Part Tests 2019

FIITJEE JEE (Advanced)-2019
PART TEST – I
Paper 1
Time Allotted: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 180

 Pl ea s e r ea d t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s c a r ef u ll y . Yo u a r e a l l o t t ed 5 m i n u t es
ALL INDIA TEST SERIES
s p ec i f i c a ll y f o r t h i s p u r p o s e.
 Yo u a r e n o t a l l o wed t o l ea v e t h e E xa m i n at i o n Ha l l b ef o r e t h e en d o f
t h e t es t .
INSTRUCTIONS
A. General Instructions
1. Attempt ALL the questions. Answers have to be marked on the OMR sheets.
2. This question paper contains Three Parts.
3. Part-I is Physics, Part-II is Chemistry and Part-III is Mathematics.
4. Each part is further divided into Two sections: Section-A & Section-D
5. Rough spaces are provided for rough work inside the question paper. No additional sheets will be
provided for rough work.
6. Blank Papers, clip boards, log tables, slide rule, calculator, cellular phones, pagers and electronic
devices, in any form, are not allowed.
B. Filling of OMR Sheet

1. Ensure matching of OMR sheet with the Question paper before you start marking your answers
on OMR sheet.
2. On the OMR sheet, darken the appropriate bubble with black pen for each character of your
Enrolment No. and write your Name, Test Centre and other details at the designated places.
3. OMR sheet contains alphabets, numerals & special characters for marking answers.
C. Marking Scheme For All Three Parts.

1. Section-A (01– 06, 19 – 24, 37 - 42) contains 18 multiple choice questions which have one or
more than one correct answer. Each question carries +4 marks for all correct answer.
Partial Marks : +3 If all the four options are correct but ONLY three options are chosen.
Partial Marks : +2 If three or more options are correct but ONLY two options are chosen, both
of which are correct options.
Partial Marks : +1 If two or more options are correct but ONLY one option is chosen and it is a
correct option.
Zero Marks : 0 If none of the options is chosen (i.e. the question is unanswered).
Negative Marks : –2 In all other cases.
Section-A (07 – 10, 25 – 28, 43 - 46) contains 12 questions. Based on this section contains TWO
(02) paragraphs. Based on each paragraph, there are TWO (02) questions.
Each question has only one correct answer and carries +3 marks for correct answer and –1
mark for wrong answer.
2. Section-D (11 – 18, 29 – 36, 47 – 54) contains 24 Numerical answer type questions with answer
XXXXX.XX and each question carries +3 marks for correct answer. There is no negative
marking.
Name of the Candidate
Enrolment No.
FIITJEE Ltd., FIITJEE House, 29-A, Kalu Sarai, Sarvapriya Vihar, New Delhi -110016, Ph 46106000, 26569493, Fax 26513942
website: www.fiitjee.com
AITS-PT-I (Paper-1)-PCM-JEE(Advanced)/19 2
Useful Data
PHYSICS
Acceleration due to gravity g = 10 m/s2

Planck constant h = 6.6 1034 J-s
Charge of electron e = 1.6  1019 C
Mass of electron me = 9.1  1031 kg
2 2
Permittivity of free space 0 = 8.85  1012 C /N-m
Density of water water = 103 kg/m3
5 2
Atmospheric pressure Pa = 10 N/m
Gas constant R = 8.314 J K1 mol1
CHEMISTRY
Gas Constant R = 8.314 J K1 mol1

= 0.0821 Lit atm K1 mol1
= 1.987  2 Cal K1 mol1
Avogadro's Number Na = 6.023  1023
Planck’s constant h = 6.625  1034 Js
= 6.625  10–27 ergs
1 Faraday = 96500 coulomb
1 calorie = 4.2 joule
1 amu = 1.66  10–27 kg
1 eV = 1.6  10–19 J
Atomic No: H=1, He = 2, Li=3, Be=4, B=5, C=6, N=7, O=8,

N=9, Na=11, Mg=12, Si=14, Al=13, P=15, S=16,
Cl=17, Ar=18, K =19, Ca=20, Cr=24, Mn=25,
Fe=26, Co=27, Ni=28, Cu = 29, Zn=30, As=33,
Br=35, Ag=47, Sn=50, I=53, Xe=54, Ba=56,
Pb=82, U=92.
Atomic masses: H=1, He=4, Li=7, Be=9, B=11, C=12, N=14, O=16,
F=19, Na=23, Mg=24, Al = 27, Si=28, P=31, S=32,
Cl=35.5, K=39, Ca=40, Cr=52, Mn=55, Fe=56, Co=59,
Ni=58.7, Cu=63.5, Zn=65.4, As=75, Br=80, Ag=108,
Sn=118.7, I=127, Xe=131, Ba=137, Pb=207, U=238.
3 AITS-PT-I (Paper-1)-PCM-JEE(Advanced)/19
PART – I (Physics), PART – II (Chemistry), PART – III (Mathematics):
(SECTION – D)
For questions 11 to 18, 29 to 36, 47 to 54.

Numerical answer type questions with answer XXXXX. XX
If answer is 348.4 / 251.37 / 213
Correct Method :
0 0 3 4 8 . 4 0
0 0 2 5 1 . 3 7
0 0 2 1 3 . 0 0
Wrong Method :
3 4 8 . 4
3 4 8 . 4
3 4 8 . 4
3 4 8 . 4
2 5 1 . 3 7
2 1 3 .
2 1 3 . 0
2 1 3 . 0
3 4 8 . 4 0
2 5 1 . 3 7
2 1 3 . 0 0
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
(One or More than one correct type)

This section contains 6 questions. Each question has FOUR options (A), (B), (C) and (D). ONE OR
MORE THAN ONE of these four options is(are) correct.
1. Bodies of mass m=0.5 kg, resting on a horizontal v0 v0

D
frictionless tabletop, are connected with an unstretched m m
spring of length L=20 cm, and of spring constant k
=16 N/m. The mass of the spring is negligible. At a certain
moment the bodies are given an initial speed of
v0=0.36 m/s, towards the wall on the right. The body at the
right collides with the wall totally elastically.
(A) The greatest compression of the spring during the motion is 9cm .
(B) The right body hit the wall again, when the spring is unstretched
(C) The change in the linear momentum of the system after all collisions will be 0.72kgm/s.
(D) Finally both the bodies will have same velocity .
2. A point like object of mass m is able to move up and down on a

vertical fixed rod. There is a vertical hole at the centre of the
object, and the rod fits into this hole, such that the object can
slide along the rod frictionlessly. Two pieces of thin light threads
are attached to the object, and initially the angle between both m
threads and the vertical is α = 45o. Each thread goes through a
pulley, which are at the same height, and at the other end of each M M
thread an object of mass M =1 kg is tied. The system is released
from rest. After releasing the system it stops at the position where
the threads attached to it are horizontal.
(A) m = 2M(2 1)
(B) The acceleration of the object of mass m when it starts to move back is zero.
(C) The acceleration of the object of mass m when it starts to move back is g.
(D) The acceleration of the other two objects of mass M, when they start to move back is g/2.
Space for Rough work
3. One end of a thread of length l = 1 m is attached to an inclined

o
plane of angle of elevation of α = 30 . A point-like body of mass
m = 1 kg is attached to the other end of the thread as shown in 
the figure. The body is released without initial speed, such that 
the thread is tight and horizontal. The coefficient of friction
between the slope and the body is µ = 0.2.
(A) The tension in the thread when the angle between the thread and the horizontal is φ is
T = (3 sin φ sin α -2µφ cos α)mg
0
(B) The tension in the string will be maximum when φ = 90 .
 2 
(C) The tension in the string will be maximum when   cos 1  
 3 tan  
(D) The maximum speed of the particle will be when φ = cos1(µcotα)
4. A small ball of mass m=0.1 kg is attached to a  =1 m-long thread and is

hung to a horizontal peg. The small ball is at rest and another small ball of

mass M=0.2 kg, is projected from the ground and collides with it, such
that the collision is totally elastic and head on, and after the collision the v0 m
ball at the end of the thread completes a whole circle around the peg. The M  
distance between the peg and the ground is 2. The value of x can be : x
(A) 0.5m (B) 1m

(C) 2m (D) 2.5m
5. Two tennis balls of mass 60 g are attached with a massless rubber thread, and held
in the vertical position as shown in the figure. In this position the unstretched length
of the rubber thread is 40 cm. The upper ball is slowly raised vertically upward, until
the lower ball just becomes unsupported by the ground. At this time the length of the
thread is 1 m. The rubber thread exerts a force which is proportional to its
extension.
(A) Work done by external agent while the upper ball was raised is 0.53J.
(B) Work done by external agent while the upper ball was raised is 0.23J.
(C) Releasing the upper ball, the speed which it hits the lower one is 5.1m/s.
(D) The time that elapses between the release of the upper ball and the collision is 0.34 sec.
6. A small rubber eraser is placed at one edge of a quarter-circle-shaped track of R

45
radius R that lies in a vertical plane and has its axis of symmetry vertical (see A
figure); it is then released. The coefficient of friction between the eraser and
B
the surface of the track is μ = 0.6. Will the eraser reach the lowest point of the
track?
0.6mgR
(A) If the particle slides from A to B work done by frictional force will be .
2
0.6mgR
(B) If the particle slides from A to B work done by frictional force will be greater than .
4 2
(C) The particle will never be able to go from A to B.
(D) If  is 2 the particle will not begin to slide.
(Paragraph Type)
This section contains TWO paragraphs. Based on the paragraph, there are TWO questions. Each
question has FOUR options (A), (B), (C) and (D). ONLY ONE of these four options is correct.
Paragraph for Question Nos. 7 and 8
A tall tower is built from alike tubes, which have thin walls, and from rectangular 20 cm
sheets, which have negligible mass with respect to that of the tubes, as shown in
the figure. rectangular sheets are numbered from bottom as S1 , S2 , S3 …..(Static
friction is big enough, such that the tubes does not slip.) The radius of each tube is
1 cm.
7. The minimum distance by which S2 should be pulled towards right so that

the tower collapses is : 5 cm
(A) 2cm (B) 3cm
(C) 4cm (D) 5cm
?
8. The minimum distance by which S6 should be pulled towards right so that
the tower collapses is :
(A) 2cm (B) 3cm
(C) 4cm (D) 5cm
A particle is suspended by three equal strings, of length a, from three points forming an equilateral
triangle of side 2b, in the horizontal plane.
9. The tension in the string will be

3mga mga
(A) (B)
3(3a2  4b2 ) 3(3a2  4b2 )
3mga mga
(C) (D)
2 2
(4a  3b ) (4a2  3b 2 )
10. If one string be cut, the tension of each of the other two strings will be changed in the ratio (i.e.
the ratio of final tension after cutting the string to tension before cutting the string):
3a2  4b2 4a2  3b2
(A) (B)
2(a2  b2 ) 2(a2  b2 )
3a 2  4b2 4a2  3b2
(C) (D)
(a2  b2 ) (a2  b2 )
SECTION – D
(Numerical Answer Type)
This section contains EIGHT questions. The answer to each question is a NUMERICAL VALUE. For
each question, enter the correct numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded‐off to the
second decimal place; e.g. xxxxx.xx).
11. A cone with height h= 1 m and a base circle of radius r = 1 m is formed from a
sector- shaped sheet of paper. The sheet is of such a size and shape that its w
two straight edges almost touch on the sloping surface of the cone. In this
state the cone is stress-free. The cone is placed on a horizontal, slippery
table-top, and loaded at its apex with a vertical force of magnitude w = 2,
h
without collapsing. The splaying of the cone is opposed by a pair of forces of
magnitude F acting tangentially at the join in the base circle (see figure).
Ignoring any frictional or bending effects in the paper, find the value of F. r
F
F
12. The two ends of a 40 cm long chain are fixed at the same height, as
shown in the figure. Find the radius of curvature of the chain at its 45 45
lowest point in cm.
13. A student of height h jumps vertically up from the “squat” position. At the top point of the jump, the
student’s center of mass is at a height 3h/4 from the ground. Find the average force F acting on
the floor prior to the moment when the student loses contact with the floor. It is known that when
the student stands on the floor, the center of mass is at a height h/2 from the floor; in the “squat”
position, the center of mass is at a height h/4 from the floor. The mass of the student is m=
0.1kg.(take g=10m/s2)
14. Two points, A and B, are located on the ground a certain distance d = 10 2m apart. Two rocks
are launched simultaneously from points A and B with equal speeds but at different angles. Each
rock lands at the launch point of the other. Knowing that one of the rocks is launched at an angle
θ = 37 with the horizontal, what is the minimum distance between the rocks during the flight?
(given cos 37 = 3/5)
15. A semi-cylinder is cut out of a block and the block is kept on the m
horizontal surface. A small body of mass m is released at the top of
the cylinder shaped hole. (Friction is negligible.)
If the block is able to move on the horizontal surface without friction, M
then the force exerted on the block by the small body at the lowest
point is 7mg/2 . Find the ratio of M/m?
16. A projectile launched from the ground explodes into three fragments of equal mass at the top
point of the trajectory. One of the fragments lands t seconds after the explosion two other
fragments land simultaneously 2t seconds after the explosion. How high above the ground does
the projectile explode? (take t= 2/5 seconds and g= 10m/s2)
17. A vertical rod of mass 4 kg is hanging on a rope and a 3-kg cat is grasping the bottom end of the
rod. The rope is cut off and the frightened cat begins to run up on the rod. While the rod is falling
vertically, the cat remains at the same height, with respect to the ground. The acceleration of the
rod is kg/4 m/s2 where g is the acceleration due to gravity. Find k.
18. One stick leans on another as shown in Figure . A right angle is

formed where they meet, and the right stick makes an angle θ with the
horizontal. The left stick extends infinitesimally beyond the end of the
right stick. The coefficient of friction between the two sticks is µ. The 
sticks have the same mass density per unit length and are both
hinged at the ground. The minimum angle θ for which the sticks don’t
fall is 300. Find µ .
Chemistry PART – II
SECTION – A

19. A mixture of 2 moles of Argon and 4 moles of PCl5 (g) were introduced in a 80 litre evacuated
vessel at 527oC. The following equilibrium was established


PCl5  g  
 PCl3  g  Cl2  g
The total pressure of the gaseous mixture in the vessel at equilibrium was found to be 6.568 atm.
Which of the following statement(s) regarding the above equilibrium is/are correct?
(A) Kc for the equilibrium is 0.025
(B) KP for the equilibrium is 1.642 atm
(C) Total number of moles of gaseous species at equilibrium is 6
(D) Number of moles of PCl5 at equilibrium is 2
20. The correct statement(s) among the following is/are

(A) Bond angle in NH3 and NF3 are same
(B) Bond angle in CH4 and CF4 are same
(C) Bond angle in PH3 is greater than AsH3
(D) Bond angle in BH4 and BF4 are same
21. The correct reaction(s) among the following is/are

(A) 3B 2O3  P2O5   2P BO2 3  O2 (B) B 2O3  CoO  Co BO2  2
(C) H3BO3  3HF  2BF3  3H2 O (D) BCl3  3H2 O  H3BO3  3HCl
22. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?

(A) In the solid NaHCO3 the HCO3 ions are linked by hydrogen bond forming an infinite chain.
(B) In the solid H3BO3, the B(OH)3 units are linked by hydrogen bond.
(C) In chloral hydrate there is intramolecular hydrogen bond.
(D) In solid KHCO3 the HCO3 ions are linked by hydrogen bond to form dimeric anion.
23. KMnO4 reacts with K2C2O4 and H2SO4 to form MnSO4, CO2, K2SO4 and H2O. Which of the
following statement(s) is/are correct for the reaction?
(A) One mole of KMnO4 reacts completely to produce 112 litre of CO2(g) at STP.
(B) One mole of KMnO4 requires 5 mole of K2C2O4 in presence of H2SO4 to react completely.
(C) One mole of K2C2O4 reacts completely to produce 2 moles of CO2.
(D) The ratio of stoichiometric coefficient of KMnO4 and K2C2O4 in this reaction is 1 : 2.
24. Which of the following hydroxide(s) is/are soluble in excess of NaOH solution?
(A) Zn(OH)2 (B) Al(OH)3
(C) Fe(OH)3 (D) Ni(OH)2
(Paragraph Type)
Paragraph for Question Nos. 25 to 26
The process of selectively precipitating an ion from a solution of more than one ion is called selective
precipitation. The selective precipitation of ions from a solution in the form of salt can be done by adding
precipitating agent slowly. AgNO3 solid is slowly added to one litre of a solution (without changing the
10
volume) containing 0.1 mole of Cl and 0.1 mole of PO34 . K sp AgCl  1.2  10 and
K sp Ag3PO 4  2.7  10 18. .
Answer the following questions based on the above paragraph.
25. Minimum concentration of Ag+ required for the precipitation of Ag3PO4 is

–9 –6
(A) 1.6 × 10 M (B) 3 × 10 M
–6
(C) 9 × 10 M (D) 3 × 10 – 9 M
26. The concentration of Cl in the solution when Ag3PO4 starts precipitating is
(A) 1.2 × 10 – 9 M (B) 4 × 10 – 11 M
–6
(C) 4 × 10 M (D) 4 × 10 – 5 M
Solid NH4HS was heated at 100oC in a closed container. The following equilibrium was established


NH4HS  s  
 NH3  g  H2 S  g 
KP for the equilibrium was found to be 0.36 atm 2. Answer the following question based on the above
equilibrium.
27. The total pressure of the mixture of a gases at equilibrium is

(A) 0.6 atm (B) 1.2 atm
(C) 0.18 atm (D) 0.9 atm
28. Which of the following statement is correct for the above equilibrium
(A) Addition of NH4HS (s) at equilibrium increases the concentration of NH3(g)
(B) Addition of inert gas at constant volume increases the number of moles of H2S
(C) Addition of inert gas at constant pressure increases the number of moles of NH3(g)
(D) Addition of NH3 at equilibrium increases Kp for the reaction
SECTION – D
29. At a certain temperature, the equilibrium constant (Kc) is 0.36 for the reaction


SO 2  g  NO2  g  
 SO3  g   NO  g
If 1.8 mole each of all the four gases are added in 1 litre container, the number of moles of SO3(g)
at equilibrium is
M M
30. 20 ml of H3PO4 solution is treated with 40 ml of NaOH solution pK a1 ,pK a2 and pK a3 of
10 10
H3PO4 are 2.15, 7.2 and 12.3 respectively. The pH of the resulting solution is
31. Total energy of electron in the 1st orbit of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV/atom. Kinetic energy of
electron in the 1st excited state of Li2+ ion in eV is
32. The half-life of first order decomposition of NH2NO2 is 6.93 hrs. at 12oC. If 6.2 g of NH2NO2 is
allowed to decompose, then the time taken in hrs for 99% decomposition of NH2NO2 is
33. A catalyst decreases activation energy of a reaction from 42 kJ mol -1 to x kJ mole-1. The rate of
reaction in the absence of the catalyst at 500 K is equal to the rate of the reaction in the presence
of catalyst at 450 K. The value of x is:
34. The half-life period of a 1st order reaction is 60 min. What percent of the reactant will be left after
180 min?
35. The weight in gram of K2Cr2O7 required to produce 5.6 L of CO2 at STP from excess of oxalic
acid in H2SO4 is : (MW of K2Cr2O7 = 294)
o
36. The wavelength of radiation in A required to excite an electron in the ground state of He2+ to the
1 o

2nd energy level is:   911.7 A 
 R 
Mathematics PART – III
SECTION – A

n2 1! 2! ..... n!
37. If lim   , where  is a non-zero real number, then
n  n
3 1
(A)   (B)  
4 2
(C)   e 3/4 (D)   e1/2
38. Ordered triple(s) (a, b, c) of positive reals that satisfy [a]bc = 3, a[b]c = 4, ab[c] = 5 (where [.]
denotes the greatest integer function) is/are
 30 30 2 30   30 30 30 
(A)  , ,  (B)  , , 
 3 4 5   3 2 5 
 
 20 20 2 20   20 20 20 
(C)  , ,  (D)  , , 
 3 3 5   3 3 5 
 
39. The function f: R  R satisfies f(x2)f(x) = f(x)f(x2)  x  R, given that f(1) = 1 and f(1) = 8, then
(A) f(1) = 2 (B) f(1) = 4
(C) f(1) = 4 (D) f(1) = 2

sinnx
40. For n  0, we have In   1  2x  sin x dx , then

(A) if n is even, then In = 0 (B) if n is odd, then In = 

(C) if n is even, then In =  (D) if n is odd, then In = 0
Space for rough work
sin2 x 1
41. Suppose a and b are real numbers such that lim ax
 , then
x 0 e  bx  1 2
(A) a = 2, b = 2 (B) a = –2, b = –2
(C) a = 2, b = –2 (D) a = –2, b = 2
42. Let a, b be real numbers such that lim

ln  2  x    1 , then
x 1 x2  ax  b
(A) a = 2 (B) b = 1
(C) a = –2 (D) b = –1
(Paragraph Type)
Read the following write up carefully and answer the following questions:
dy
An equation is called variable separable if it is of the form  f  x  g  y  . In this case we formally
dx
dy
separate the variable and write  g  y    f  x  dx , which after the integration gives the solution in implicit
form.
 x f t 
43. 
Differentiable function f: R  R satisfying the equation f  x   1  x 2 1   2 
dt  is
 0 1  t 
(A) f(x) = cex(1 – x2) (B) f(x) = cex(1 + x3)
(C) f(x) = cex(1 + x2) (D) f(x) = cex(1 – x3)
44. Suppose f(x) and g(x) are differentiable functions such that xg(f(x))f(g(x))g(x) = f(g(x))g(f(x))f(x)
x
e 2x
 x  R. Moreover, f(x) is non-negative, g(x) is positive and  f  g  t   dt  1   x  R.
0
2
If g(f(0)) = 1, then g(f(4)) is
(A) e 16 (B) e8
(C) e4 (D) e2
b
If g(x) = f(x), then  f(x)dx = g(b) – g(a).
a
 2018
 ln x 
45. Evaluate   x  dx
1
2016! 2017!
(A) 2019
(B)
 2017   2018 2019
2017! 2018!
(C) 2018
(D)
 2019   2017 2019
1
2x332  x 998  4x1664 sin x 691
46. The value of integral  dx
1 1  x 666
2   2  
(A) 1 (B) 1
333  3  333  5 
2   2  
(C) 1 (D) 1 
333  4  
333  4 
SECTION – D
1 1
2
47. Let f: R  R be a continuous function with  f  x  f   x   0 and   f  x   f   x  dx  18 , then the
0 0
1
4
value of   f  x  f   x  dx is _____
0
48. Let f: R  R be a differentiable function such that f(0) = 0, f(1) = 1 and |f(x)| < 2  x  R, if a and
1
b are real numbers such that the set of possible values of  f  x  dx is the open interval (a, b),
0
then (b – a) is _____
49. Let f: R  R be a continuous function which satisfies the identity f(2x) = 3f(x)  x  R.
1 2
1
If  f  x  dx  1 , then  f  x  dx is _____
0
21
1
3 2 1
50. Let f 1(x) = f(x) and for n  1 f n1  x   f n  f  x   . If f(x) = x 3  x  x  , then f
2004
 x  dx is
2 4 0
_____
51. Let p(x) be a fourth degree polynomial, with derivative p(x),

such that p(1) = p(3) = p(5) = p(7) = 0. If x is a real number such that p(x) = 0 and x is not equal
to 1, 3 or 5, then 11x is _____
p2
52. If L = lim xp
x 
 3

x  1  3 x  1  2 3 x , where L is some non-zero real number, then
L
is _____
 
tx 1
 1 1
53. If  e f  x  dx  sin  t   , then
2   x f  x  dx is _____
2 2 
 
54. Let f: R+  R be a differentiable function such that the tangent to curve y = f(x) always meets the
y-axis at point whose ordinate is one less than the ordinate of the point of contact. If f(1) = 0, then
1 f  2
e is _____
5
PART TEST – I
Paper 2

t h e t es t .
INSTRUCTIONS
4. Each part is further divided into two sections: Section-A & Section-D.
on OMR sheet.

1. Section-A (01 – 06, 19 – 24, 37 - 42) contains 18 multiple choice questions which have one or
more than one correct answer. Each question carries +4 marks for all correct answer.
Partial Marks : +3 If all the four options are correct but ONLY three options are chosen.
Partial Marks : +2 If three or more options are correct but ONLY two options are chosen, both
of which are correct options.
Partial Marks : +1 If two or more options are correct but ONLY one option is chosen and it is a
correct option.
Zero Marks : 0 If none of the options is chosen (i.e. the question is unanswered).
Negative Marks : –2 In all other cases.
Section-A (07 – 10, 25 – 28, 43 – 46) contains 12 questions. Each question has TWO (02)
matching lists: LIST‐ I and LIST‐ II. FOUR options are given representing matching of elements
from LIST‐ I and LIST‐ II. ONLY ONE of these four options corresponds to a correct matching.
For each question, choose the option corresponding to the correct matching.
XXXXX.XX and each question carries +3 marks for correct answer. There is no negative marking.
Enrolment No.
Useful Data
PHYSICS
2
Acceleration due to gravity g = 10 m/s
Permittivity of free space 0 = 8.85  1012 C2/N-m2
Atmospheric pressure Pa = 105 N/m2
CHEMISTRY

= 0.0821 Lit atm K1 mol1
= 1.987  2 Cal K1 mol1
= 6.625  10–27 ergs
1 amu = 1.66  10–27 kg
1 eV = 1.6  10–19 J

N=9, Na=11, Mg=12, Si=14, Al=13, P=15, S=16,
Cl=17, Ar=18, K =19, Ca=20, Cr=24, Mn=25,
Fe=26, Co=27, Ni=28, Cu = 29, Zn=30, As=33,
Br=35, Ag=47, Sn=50, I=53, Xe=54, Ba=56,
Pb=82, U=92.
F=19, Na=23, Mg=24, Al = 27, Si=28, P=31, S=32,
Cl=35.5, K=39, Ca=40, Cr=52, Mn=55, Fe=56, Co=59,
Ni=58.7, Cu=63.5, Zn=65.4, As=75, Br=80, Ag=108,
Sn=118.7, I=127, Xe=131, Ba=137, Pb=207, U=238.
(SECTION – D)

If answer is 348.4 / 251.37 / 213
Correct Method :
0 0 3 4 8 . 4 0
0 0 2 5 1 . 3 7
0 0 2 1 3 . 0 0
Wrong Method :
3 4 8 . 4
3 4 8 . 4
3 4 8 . 4
3 4 8 . 4
2 5 1 . 3 7
2 1 3 .
2 1 3 . 0
2 1 3 . 0
3 4 8 . 4 0
2 5 1 . 3 7
2 1 3 . 0 0
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
1. A long thin uniform rod lies flat on the table as shown. One end of the
rod is slowly pulled up by a force that remains perpendicular to the rod
at all times. The rod is to be brought to the vertical position without any
slipping of the bottom end? The coefficient of static friction between rod
and ground can be:
(A) 0.2 (B) 0.3
(C) 0.4 (D) 0.5
2. Board A is placed on board B as shown. Both boards slide, without moving with respect to each
other, along a frictionless horizontal surface at a speed v . Board B hits a resting board C “head-
on.”
A A
B C B C
V=0
Before Collision After Collision

After the collision, boards B and C move together, and board A slides on top of board C and
stops its motion relative to C in the position shown on the diagram. All three boards have the
same mass, size, and shape. It is known there is no friction between boards A and B; the
coefficient of kinetic friction between boards A and C is µk.
v2
(A) The length of each board is
6k g
(B) The final speed of each board is 2v/3.
(C) Total work done by frictional force on the system is zero.
mv 2
(D) Total work done by frictional force on C is .
12
3. Two balls of masses M and m are attached to two threads of length l, M   m

such that the two threads are suspended at the same point. The balls are
both deflected to the horizontal position of the threads, released from rest
at the same time, and they collide head on. (The collision is perfectly
elastic.). If the ball of mass m reaches the maximum height which is
allowed M/m can be :
(A) 0.5 (B) 1.5
(C) 2 (D) 2.5
4. A dumbbell consists of a light rod of length r and two small masses m attached to it.
The dumbbell stands vertically in the corner formed by two frictionless planes. After the
bottom end is slightly moved to the right, the dumbbell begins to slide. At the moment
the top end loses contact with the vertical plane:
(A) The acceleration of top mass is g.
(B) Horizontal component of acceleration of bottom mass is zero.
(C) The height of the top mass will be 2r/3.
2
(D) Speed of the bottom mass will be gR .
3
5. Two small spheres of mass m each are attached to the ends of a light rigid rod pivot
bent at a right angle and pivoted in the vertical plane at the vertex of the right
angle. The vertical part of the rod is three times as long as the horizontal part.
Initially, the rod is held at rest in the position shown in the diagram. The pivot is
frictionless. Assume that mass of rods are negligible. Immediately after the
system is released.
3
(A) Horizontal component of acceleration of center of mass of the system is m/s2 towards
10
right.
1
(B) Vertical component of acceleration of center of mass of the system is m/s2 downwards.
20
3mg
(C) Horizontal component of hinge reaction is towards right.
10
19mg
(D) Vertical component of hinge reaction is upwards.
20
6. Two identical uniform cylinders of radius R each are placed on top of each
other next to a wall as shown. After a disturbance, the bottom cylinder slightly
moves to the right and the system comes into motion. Neglect friction
between all surfaces.
(A) The top cylinder will have maximum acceleration g.
(B) The speed of the bottom cylinder will first increase then decrease.
(C) Minimum acceleration of the bottom cylinder is zero.
2
(D) Maximum speed of the bottom cylinder is gR
3
(Matching List Type)

This section contains FOUR questions. Each question has TWO matching lists: LIST‐I and LIST‐II.
FOUR options are given representing matching of elements from LIST‐I and LIST‐II. ONLY ONE of
these four options corresponds to a correct matching.
7. Block a moving on frictionless horizontal plane collides vA

Block A Block B
head-on with block B initially at rest. The collision is NOT
(0 < e < 1) perfectly elastic. Match the List-I with the
related graph in List-II.
LIST–I LIST–II
1.
P. Forces exerted by the blocks

time
2.
The position of mass centre of the two
Q.
block system
time
3.
R. Velocity of blocks
time
4.
S. Position of block B
time
5.
time
(A) P → 4; Q → 4; R → 1; S→4
(B) P → 3; Q → 3; R → 1; S→3
(C) P → 3; Q → 5; R → 4; S→2
(D) P → 4; Q → 3; R → 4; S→1
8. A rectangular block of mass m = 0.3 kg is held 

stationary with the help of massless rod of length  = h
10 m in vertical plane as shown in the figure. Vertical B
wall is frictionless and coefficient of friction between
block and rod is  = 0.75. Now match the value of
physical quantities mentioned in List – I with List – II. g
A (Hinge)
LIST–I LIST–II (values of a)

The value of h in meter so that block 1.
P. 1.5
remains stationary
Magnitude of normal force in Newton 2.
Q. 5
given by wall to the block
R. Magnitude of Hinge reaction in Newton 3. 4
Magnitude of friction force acting on the 4.
S. 3
block
5. 2
(A) P → 1, 5; Q → 3; R → 2; S→4
(B) P → 1, 5; Q → 1; R → 2; S→3
(C) P → 3, 1; Q → 2; R → 3; S→4
(D) P → 3, 3; Q → 1; R → 3; S→4
9. Three identical cylinders are arranged in a triangle as shown in Figure, with (3)
the bottom two lying on the ground. The ground and the cylinders are F (1) (2)
frictionless. You apply a constant horizontal force (directed to the right) on the
left cylinder. Let a be the acceleration you give to the system.
N12 is normal reaction between (1) and (2)
List –II shows various values of a.
Match the functions in List-I with the related charge distributions in List-II.
LIST–I LIST–II (values of a)
P. N12 = 0, N13  0 1. g
2. g
Q. N12  0, N13  0
2 3
3. g
R. N12  0, N13 = 0
4 3
4. g
S. N23 = 0, N13  0
6 3
5. Never possible
(A) P → 3, 4; Q → 2; R → 5; S→1
(B) P → 3, 2; Q → 1; R → 4; S→3
(C) P → 3, 1; Q → 2; R → 3; S→4
(D) P → 3, 3; Q → 1; R → 3; S→4
10. A uniform rod of mass 6 kg and length 1m is hinged

O
at O and a small bob of mass 1 kg is attached to its A
other end. The system is kept horizontal and then
released. The quantities mentioned under Column I
are measured and their magnitudes (in SI) are given Hinge bob
in column II, but not necessarily in the proper order.
Match the quantities in List I with their corresponding
2
values in List II. Take g = 10 m/s .
LIST–I LIST–II (in SI units)

Angular acceleration of rod 1. 10
P.
3
Linear acceleration of bob 2. 20
Q.
3
Force exerted by the rod on the bob 3. 40
R.
3
Force exerted by the hinge on the rod 4. 50
S.
3
5. 160
3
(A) P → 5; Q → 3, 4; R → 1; S→2
(B) P → 3; Q → 3; R → 1, 4; S→5
(C) P → 5; Q → 3; R → 1, 2; S→4
(D) P → 4; Q → 2, 3; R → 1; S→5
SECTION – D
11. The wedge shown in the figure can slide without friction on a m
horizontal tabletop. The mass of the wedge is M and its angle of
o
elevation is α =30 . A body of mass m slides down without friction
along the wedge, the path of the body makes an angle of φ = 60o with
M
the ground. Find the ratio of the masses, m/M.
 
12. A path is made to a uniform density cube of a

mass m, and of edge a, such that when the cube m
rolls along the path without skidding, its centre v0
moves along a straight line. At the top of the path a
horizontal velocity of center of mass is v 0 and the
cube is in pure rolling. The static frictional force is
big enough, so the cube do not slide anywhere.
The speed of the centre of mass when the cube
k vo
touches the lowest point of the path is ?
2
(The moment of inertia of the cube with respect to
its centre of mass is ma2/6). Find k.
13. A block is placed on a long and wide inclined plane that makes angle  = 45 with the horizontal.
The coefficient of kinetic friction between the block and the plane is µk = 2. After a quick push, the
block acquires velocity v 0 = 62 m/s that makes angle  = 60 with the line of fastest descent.
Find the time interval t during which the block is in motion. (take g = 10 m/s2)
14. A carpet runner is placed onto a long straight inclined plane

parallel to the steepest line in the plane, from the bottom of
the slope till its top. The carpet is thin and flexible, and it
cannot slide down because of the friction, but it can easily be
lifted, it does not stick to the plane. The top end of the carpet 
is rolled, a bit, and this hoop of carpet is released. The hoop
rolls down the slope with greater and greater speed, while its
diameter increases, and finally it reaches the bottom of the
slope during a time of t1. If a solid cylinder is released at the
top of the slope, it reaches the bottom in a time of t2. The ratio
t
of 1  k . Find k .
t2
15. A ball is thrown at speed v from zero height on level ground. The angle at which the particle is
thrown is such that the area under the trajectory is maximum? If the angle of projection in /k .
Find k .
16. A mass, which is free to move on a horizontal frictionless surface, is (top view)
attached to one end of a massless string that wraps partially around a
frictionless vertical pole of radius r (see the top view in Figure). You
hold on to the other end of the string. At t = 0, the mass has speed v 0 =
1m/s in the tangential direction along the dotted circle of radius R
shown. Your task is to pull on the string so that the mass keeps moving
along the dotted circle. You are required to do this in such a way that
the string remains in contact with the pole at all times. (You will have to
move your hand around the pole, of course.) What is the speed of the hand
R
mass at time t  ?
2v 0 tan 
17. A mass M collides elastically with a stationary mass m. If M = 2m, then there is a maximal angle
of deflection of M. This maximal angle equals /k radians. Find k .
18. A uniform flexible rope passes over two small frictionless pulleys
h
mounted at the same height (see figure). The length of rope

between the pulleys is  = 23 m, and its ‘sag’ is h = 1 m. In
S=?
equilibrium, what is the length s of the rope segments that hang
down on either side?
SECTION – A
19. 

For the equilibrium SO 2  g  Cl2  g  
 SO 2Cl2  g  , the correct statement(s) is/are
(A) Addition of SO2(g) at constant volume at equilibrium increases the concentration of SO2Cl2(g)
(B) Addition of SO2(g) at constant volume at equilibrium increases the concentration of SO2(g)
(C) Addition of SO2Cl2(g) at constant volume at equilibrium increases the concentration of
SO2Cl2(g)
(D) Addition of inert gas at constant volume at equilibrium increases the concentration of
SO2Cl2 (g)
20. The incorrect statement(s) among the following is/are

(A) 2-Ethylantraquinone on oxidation in air produces H2O2.
(B) Peroxydisulphuric acid on hydrolysis produces H2O2.
(C) Acetanilide catalyses the decomposition of H2O2.
(D) H2O2 reduces sodium hypochlorite to sodium chloride.
21. The correct statement(s) among the following is/are

(A) The shape of SF3Cl molecule is tetrahedral
(B) In PCl2F3 all the three F atoms remain in the equatorial position.
(C) The shape of ICl4 is square planar.
(D) I2Cl6 is a planar molecule in the solid state.
22. The product(s) of hydrolysis of B3N3H6 is/are

(A) NH3 (B) H3BO3
(C) H2 (D) B2H6
23. Cyclic silicate among the following is/are

(A) Ca3Si3O9 (B) Mg2SiO4
(C) Be3Al2Si6O18 (D) Sc2Si2O7
24. The incorrect order among the following is/are

(A) LiH > NaH > KH (Thermal stability)
(B) MgSO4 > CaSO4 > SrSO4 (Solubility in water)
(C) Li < Na < K < Rb (Density)
(D) Be(OH)2 > Mg(OH)2 > Ca (OH)2 (Basic nature)

25. Match each set of hybrid orbital from List – I with the molecule or ion given in List - II
LIST–I LIST–II
P. sp2 1. XeF5
Q. sp3 2. NO3
R. sp3d 3. NF4
S. sp3d2 4. SF2Cl2
5. IOF4
6. F2SeO
(A) P → 2; Q → 3; R → 4, 6; S → 1, 5
(B) P → 2; Q → 3, 6; R → 4; S → 1, 5
(C) P → 4; Q → 2; R → 3, 5; S→6
(D) P → 6; Q → 3, 6; R → 4, 2; S→1
26. Match the resulting solution in List-I with one or more properties in List – II and choose the correct
option. log2 = 0.3, log5 = 0.7. pKa CH3COOH = 4.74, pKb NH4OH = 4.74,
LIST–I LIST–II
P. 10 ml 0.1 M H2SO4 + 40 ml 0.1 M NH4OH 1. Acidic buffer solution
Q. 20 ml 0.1 M CH3COOH + 16 ml 0.1 M NaOH 2. Basic buffer solution
R. 50 ml 0.1 M CH3COOH + 50 ml 0.1 M NaOH 3. pH of the solution is 8.72
S. 10 ml 0.1 M NH4OH + 20 ml 0.1 M NH4Cl 4. pH of the solution is 8.96
5. pH of the solution 9.26
(A) P → 2, 4; Q → 1, 5; R → 3; S→2
(B) P → 2, 3; Q → 1, 4; R → 3, 1; S → 2, 4
(C) P → 5; Q → 1; R → 3, 4; S → 2
(D) P → 2, 5; Q → 1; R → 3; S → 2, 4
27. Match the half-life of the reaction in List-I with the integrated rate equation in List-II(a = initial
concentration of reactant and a – x = concentration of reactant at time ‘t’.)
LIST–I LIST–II
0.586 1. x
P. t1/2  a k
k t
0.693 2. 1 1 1
Q. t1/2  k   
k t a  x a
a 3. 2
R. t1/2  k   a  a  x
2k t 
1 4. 2.303 a
S. t1/2  k log
ka t ax
5. 2 1 1 
k   
t  ax a
(A) P → 5; Q → 4; R → 1; S→2
(B) P → 3; Q → 4; R → 1; S→2
(C) P → 2; Q → 3; R → 1; S→2
(D) P → 3; Q → 2; R → 4; S→5
28. List-I contains carbides and List-II contains the type of carbide and their hydrolysis product.
LIST–I LIST–II
P. Al4C3 1. Covalent carbide
Q. Mg2C3 2. Ionic carbide
R. CaC2 3. CH4
S. SiC 4. C3H4
5. C2H2
(A) P → 2, 3; Q → 2, 4; R → 2, 5; S → 1
(B) P → 1, 3; Q → 1, 4; R → 2, 5; S → 2
(C) P → 2, 4; Q → 1, 3; R → 1, 5; S → 5
(D) P → 2, 5; Q → 2, 4; R → 2, 3; S → 1
SECTION – D
29. A first order reaction has a rate constant 5  10 2 s1 . The time required (in sec) for the reaction to
reduce 20 gram of the reactant to 2 g is
30. 20 g of CaCO3 is placed in a vessel of volume 12.315 litre at 1000 K. The following equilibrium
was established.


CaCO3  s  
 CaO  s   CO2  g 
KP for the reaction at 1000 K is 0.3 atm. The mass of CaCO3 in gram at equilibrium is
31. 100 ml of 0.1 M CH3COOH, 50 ml 0.1 M HCl and 50 ml 0.1 M Ba(OH)2 are mixed together. pKa of
CH3COOH is 4.74. The pH of the resulting solution is
32. The mass of a dust particle is 10-12 g and its velocity is 10-4 cm/sec. The error in the
measurement of velocity is 0.01%. The uncertainty in the measurement of position in A o unit is
 h 
  0.527  10 27 erg sec 
 4 
33. Vapour density of a metal chloride is 85.02. The equivalent weight of the metal is 7.01. The
atomic weight of the metal is
34. In He2+ an electron undergoes transition from 3rd excited state of to 2nd energy level. The
1 
wavelength of the light emitted in Ao is   911.7A o 
R 
35. In the thermal decomposition of NH4NO2, 50% of the compound decomposed in 34.65 min. The
time required in minutes for the 90% decomposition of the compound is
36. The equilibrium constant (KP) for a reaction at 27oC for a homogeneous gaseous reaction is 10-2.
The standard free energy change  Go  for the reaction in calorie is (R = 2 cal)
SECTION – A

m
cos x  n cos x
37. For two positive integers m and n lim , then which is true?
x 0 x2
1 3
(A) m = 3, n = 2 it is (B) m = 5, n = 2 it is
6 13
1 3
(C) m = 3, n = 2 it is (D) m = 5, n = 2 it is
12 20
ex
38. Let f  x   and g(x) = f(x), then
1 x2
(A) g(x) has two local maxima and two local minima points
(B) g(x) has exactly one local maxima and one local minima point
(C) x = 1 is a point of local maxima of g(x)
(D) there is a point of local maxima for g(x) in the interval (–1, 0)
 minf  t  , 2  t  x, 2  x  0
2

39. Let f(x) = x – 2|x| and g  x   max f  t  , 0  t  x, 0  x  2 , then g(x) is not differentiable at

 f  x  x2
(A) x = 0 (B) x = –1
(C) x = 2 (D) x = 1
40. The function f: {0, 1, 2, .....}  {0, 1, 2, .....}  R satisfying

1
 f  x  1, y  1  f  x  1, y  1  1 if x  y  0
f  x, y    2 , then which is true
0 if x  y  0
(A) f(3, 5) = 15 (B) f(5, 3) = 15
(C) f(9, 2) = 18 (D) f(2, 9) = 18
x
41. The equations of the normals to the curve f  x   at the points where the tangents make
1 x2

angle of with the positive direction of x-axis are
4
3
(A) x + y = 0 (B) x  y 
2
 3
(C) x  y  2 2 (D) x  y 
2
42. Let f be a function defined for all real x and let it satisfy the relation f(x + y) = f(x) + f(y) + xy(x + y)
if f(0) = –1, then
(A) f is differentiable for all real x
(B) f is differentiable for all real x
(C) f(3) = 8
 1  1
(D) f satisfies the relation f   x   f     f   x  f     x  0
x
  x

43. Match the following List-I with List-II

LIST–I LIST–II
If f: R  R is a differentiable function with the property that lim f  x 
x 
P. 1. 1
exist and is finite, and if lim x  f   x  exists, then this limit is equal to
x 
Let f and g be n-times continuously differentiable function in a

neighbourhood of a point ‘a’, such that f(a) = g(a) = ln 2.
n–1 (n – 1 n n
Q. f(a) = g(a) ..... f (a) = g (a) and f (a)  g (a), then 2. 3
e   e  
f x g x
lim is
x a f  x   g  x 
Let f: [a, b]  R be a function continuous on [a, b] and differentiable on

f b   f  c 
R. (a, b) if there exist C  (a, b) such that  0 , then there 3. 5
f  c   f a 
always exist   (a, b), then f() is equal to
x b
b
S. ea  e x 4. 7
Let a and b be positive real numbers, then  dx is
a
x
5. 2
6. 0
The correct option is:

(A) P → 4; Q → 6; R → 2; S → 1
(B) P → 1; Q → 4; R → 2; S → 3
(C) P → 4; Q → 6; R → 5; S → 2
(D) P → 6; Q → 5; R → 6; S → 6

LIST–I LIST–II
 2
x 2 
P.  1  sin x  dx 1. tan1 

2
1  sin x  4
2
tan1 x
Q. Evaluate  2 dx 2. 0
1/2 x  x  1
 /2
x cos x  sin x 3 
R.  dx 3. tan1 
0 x2  sin x  4
1 3
x  3
S.  3 1  x  3 1 x dx 4.
18
1
3
5.
3
2 3
6.
18

(A) P → 5; Q → 6; R → 2; S → 1
(B) P → 1; Q → 4; R → 2; S → 3
(C) P → 5; Q → 6; R → 1; S → 2
(D) P → 4; Q → 2; R → 3; S → 1

LIST–I LIST–II
  
f: R  R; f  x    e x  (where [.] denotes the
P. 1. one-one
greatest integer function, and {.} denotes fractional
part function)
2
sgn x 
Let f: R  R defined as f  x   e  ex (where
Q. 2. many one
sgn x denotes signum function of x, then f(x))
 1  1
f: R  R; f  x    x     x    2  x  (where [.]
R.  2   2  3. into and periodic
denotes the greatest integer function)
x2  x
S. f: [–1, )  (0, ) defined as f  x   e , then f(x) 4. onto
is
5. periodic
6. constant

(A) P → 4; Q → 6; R → 2; S → 1
(B) P → 2; Q → 2; R → 5; S → 2
(C) P → 4; Q → 6; R → 5; S → 2
(D) P → 2; Q → 2; R → 3; S → 1

LIST–I LIST–II
–1 2
Area bounded by the curve y – sin x = x – x , and the x-axis
P. 1. 0
is equal to
The area bounded by y = x 2 – 3 and the line y = ax + 2 attains
Q. 2. 1
its minimum value than the parameter ‘a’ is equal to
The area of the region represented by the expression
R. 3. –1
2  xy  xy 2 2
If k is a positive number and the area of the region bounded

S. by the curves y = x – kx2 and ky = x2 attains its maximum 4. 6
value, then k is equal to
5. 2
6. 3

(A) P → 3; Q → 6; R → 2; S → 1
(B) P → 1; Q → 4; R → 2; S → 3
(C) P → 4; Q → 6; R → 5; S → 2
(D) P → 3; Q → 1; R → 4; S → 2
SECTION – D
1 1  1
  1 
47. If limit lim n
n 
2 n 

11  22  33 ..... nn  n2 = L, then –ln L is _____
48. The positive value of ‘a’ such that the parabola y = x2 + 1, bisects the area of the rectangle with
a
vertices (0, 0), (a, 0), (0, a2 + 1), (a, a2 + 1), then is _____
2 3
49. Let A – rational number between (0, 1), and a function f: A  R has the property that for all x  A
 1 2001 f  2007
f  x   f  1    ln x , then the value and e is _____
 x 2014
4
k
50. The value of which minimizes F  k    x  4  x   k dx _____
2 0
51. For x a real number, let f(x) = 0 if x < 1 and f(x) = 2x – 2 if x  1. If number of solutions to the
n
 
equation f f f  f  x    x is n, then
5
is equal to _____
52. For any real   1 denote by f() the real solution to the equation x(1 + ln x) = , then
1 f 
lim is _____
2    
 
 ln  
1 4
 x  x   
6
53.  x3 3
 2 3 dx =  x 6  2x3 3  c , then 2 is equal to _____
54. The differentiable function F: R  R satisfies F(0) = –1 and

F  
F  x    sin  sin  sin  sin  x      cos  sin  sin  x     cos  sin  x    cos  x  . Then  2
is _____
1 AITS-PT-I (Paper-1)-PCM (Sol.)-JEE(Advanced)/19
FIITJEE JEE(Advanced)-2019
ANSWERS, HINTS & SOLUTIONS
PART TEST – I
PAPER-1
Q. No. PHYSICS Q. No. CHEMISTRY Q. No. MATHEMATICS
1. A, B, C, D 19. A, B, D 37. B, C
2. A, C 20. B, C, D 38. A, B
3. A, C, D 21. B, C, D 39. A, B
4. D 22. A, B, C, D 40. A, B
5. A, C, D 23. A, C 41. A, B
6. B, C, D 24. A, B 42. B, C
7. D 25. B 43. C
8. D 26. D 44. A
9. B 27. B 45. D
10. A 28. C 46. D
11. 00001.00 29. 00001.35 47. 00097.20
12. 00020.00 30. 00009.75 48. 00000.75
13. 00002.00 31. 00030.60 49. 00002.50
14. 00002.00 32. 00046.06 50. 00000.50
15. 00004.00 33. 00037.80 51. 00089.00
16. 00002.00 34. 00012.50 52. –00012.50
17. 00007.00 35. 00012.25 53. 00000.50
18. 00003.00 36. 00303.90 54. 00000.40
AITS-PT-I (Paper-1)-PCM (Sol.)-JEE(Advanced)/19 2
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
1. Immediately after 1st collision: v0 v0

Since the situation is symmetric, both will come to rest m m
simultaneously.
x0 : maximum compression
1 1
2  mv 02  kx 20
 2 2
2m
x0  v0
 K
Just before 2nd collision: v0 v0
Finally:
 m m
 P  4mv 0 ()
v0 v0
2. Applying work energy theorem from initial to final state (i to f)

2Mgx  mgy = 0 f
a
 2Mx = mg …(i) 45
Keeping length of the string constant
 2y  0  y  x  a
i
y( 2  1)  x …(ii) x x
From (i) and (ii) f f
 2My(2 1) = my
 m = 2M(2 1)
In the final state instantaneous acceleration of m has to be g as there will be only one force
(That’s mg). and the acceleration of masses M are zero at the same moment .
mv 2
3. T  mg sin  sin  = …(i)
 g sin 
dv
mg sin  cos    mg cos  = m …(ii) P
dt 
work energy theorem T f = mg cos 
v2/
1
(mg sin )  sin   (mg cos )  = mv 2 …(iii)
2 mg sin  sin 
From (i) and (iii) mg sin  cos
 T  mg sin  sin  = mg sin  sin  2(mg cos ) 
 T = mg (3 sin  sin   2   cos )
dT
 0  3 sin  cos   2 cos 
d
4. Mv 0cos  + 0 = Mv + mv
v  v
e=1= 
v 0 cos 
v0 m
2Mv 0 cos 
v   5g M  
Mm
x
Also, x = R/2 and  = H
3 10
Solving  x 
4
x  2.37 m
5. Fext = kx + mg ( x : extension at any t)

x0
 W ext =  (kx  mg)dx , where kx0 = mg

0
Releasing, total work done = W ext + mg(h), where h : natural length
6. Underestimate the work done against friction, and compare it with the initial gravitational potential
energy of the eraser.
First of all, we investigate whether the rubber eraser will start moving at all. It will do so provided
that mg sin α>μmg cos α, i.e. μ< tan α = tan 45◦ = 1. This is clearly the case, since μ = 0.6. So,
the eraser will start moving. The trouble is that the determination of how the normal force acting
on the eraser varies with position is difficult. A calculation of the work done against friction can be
carried out, to any given degree of accuracy, only by using a computer. The trouble is that the
determination of how the normal force acting on the eraser varies with position is difficult.
However, it is certain that the frictional force is always larger than its initial value of μmg cos α =
μmg cos 45◦ This is because, after the initial release, the angle with the horizontal made by the
slope on which the eraser moves decreases, and, in addition, the track has to provide a
centripetal force for the moving eraser. The path to reach the lowest point of the track would be
one-eighth of a circle, with a length of Rπ/4. The work done against friction can now be
underestimated by taking the normal force as if it always had its initial value:
 mg  R
W f  Wund   0.333mgR
2 4
The gravitational potential energy difference between the initial position and the bottom of the
track is ΔEp = mgR(1 − cos α) = mgR(1 − cos 45◦) ≈ 0.293mgR.
It can be seen that |W f| >ΔEp, i.e. the work to be done against friction is clearly larger than what
can be provided by the gravitational potential energy. So, the rubber eraser cannot reach the very
lowest part of the track.
7-8. The pipes just below and just above the sheet which is moving will move the other pipes and the
other pipes will remain in the original place. If the sheet is moved by distance greater then 5 cm
the centre of gravity of the system would fall outside the base and the system will collapse.
P
b 3 2b A
9-10. cos 30    BO =
(BO) 2 3
a
Let P be particle clearly, O
O
3Ti cos  = mg
30 2b/3
mg mga B
Ti  sec   B 2b C
3 3(3a2  4b 2 )
SECTION – D
11. Imagine the apex of the cone being depressed by Δh, and the radius of its base consequently
increasing by Δr, i.e. the perimeter of the base circle increases by 2πΔr. Then the total work done
by external forces would be:
wh  F(2r) = 0
w h
 F
2  r
However, the changes in height and base circle radius are not independent, the connection
between them being determined by the fixed length of one of the straight edges of the sheet.
Using Pythagoras’s theorem:
2 2
 r  r    h   h    2  r 2  h2
from which we have
h 2r  r r
 
r 2h  h h
So the force in question has magnitude
w r
F =1
2 h
12. The weight of the chain is balanced by the vertical components of the reaction forces at the two
suspension points. The magnitude of each of these components must be F0 = ρLg/2, where  is
the mass of the chain per unit length, and L = 40 cm. If the chain made an angle of θ with the
vertical at a suspension point, the horizontal component of the chain’s tension would be F0tan θ.
Because, in practice, θ = 45◦, the horizontal component is the same as the vertical one; it is also
constant along the chain, since there are horizontal forces acting on the chain only at its ends.
At the chain’s lowest point, the tension is purely horizontal, and, as just shown, its magnitude is
F0. So, around the lowest point, consider a small piece of the chain that subtends an angle 2 at
the centre of the osculating circle, whose radius is the value r1 we seek. The length of the piece is
2r1 and it is pulled down by a gravitational force 2r1ρg. This force is balanced by the upward net
force of 2F0sin  due to the tension in the chain. In the limit of small angles, when sin  ≈ , the
equilibrium equation
2r1ρg = 2F0 sin 
leads to
F0 = ρgr1.
Since F0 = ρLg/2, we have the simple result that r1 = L/2 = 20 cm.
13. Method 1: Even though the normal force with the floor does no physical work on the person
(energy transfers occur internally from the muscles), one can write a mathematically correct
expression as though the contact force with the floor does change the person’s energy. Hence,
we can treat the center of mass motion as Wnet = ΔKcm. Here, we are treating it as though only
gravity and the floor act onthe person, and since the person is in contact with the floor until the
h  h 
center of mass is a position h/2 from the ground, then Ffloor   mg  0
4  2 
as the student starts and ends this motion at rest. Therefore, Ffloor = 2mg.
Method 2: Since the feet come off the floor at a position h/2 from the ground, then the person
accelerates upward from h/4 to h/2 with the same magnitude as the acceleration from h/2 to 3h/4
by symmetry. Therefore, the net force on the student going upward is the same in magnitude as
the student in free fall from h/2 to 3h/4. Hence, while in contact with the floor, using Newton’s
second law, Ffloor – mg = mg ➯ Ffloor = 2mg.
d
14. xmin = d sin (5345) = 2 
5 2 v BA
xmin
5345
A B
d
15. Momentum conservation along m

x axis y
0 = mv2  Mv1 R m v2
Work energy theorem x
M v1 M
1 1
mgR = mv 22  Mv12
2 2
from (i) and (ii)
m2 2
 2mgR = mv 22  v2
M
2gRM m 2gRM
 v 2 and v 1 
Mm M Mm
Making FBD of particle with respect wedge at lowest point.
7mg m(v 1  v 2 )2 N = (7mg/2)
 mg 
2 R (v  v1 ) 2
M  2
Substituting the values, we get : 4 R
m
mg
16. Let us call h the height above the ground at which the projectile explodes and v jy (j=1, 2, 3) the y-
component of the velocity at the moment of the explosion for the three fragments. I will label with
1 the fragment which lands after t seconds.
Since the landing time depends only on the y-component of the velocity at the moment of the
explosion, we have: v3y = v2y . We then need only the equations for fragments 1 and 2, stating
that at landing time the y-coordinate will be equal to 0:
gt 2
h  v 1y t  0
2
g(2t)2
h  v 2y t  0
2
Since the masses of the three fragments are equal, and the y-component of the projectile
momentum at the moment of the explosion is equal to 0 (it explodes at the top of the trajectory),
the momentum conservation law reads:
v1y + v2y + v3y = 0.
The solution of the above equations is then:
3
v1y  gt
4
3
v 2 y  v 3 y  gt
8
The height above the ground at which the projectile explodes is then: h = 5gt2/4
17. Tension T = weigth of cat (since cat is at rest).

 Net downward force on rod = T + 4g
3g  4g
arod  = 7g/4 m/s2
4
18. Let Ml be the mass of the left stick, and let Mr be the mass of the right Ff
stick. Then Ml/Mr = tan θ. Let N and Ff be the normal and friction N
forces between the sticks. Ff has a maximum value of µN. Balancing
the torques on the left stick (around the contact point with the ground)
gives N = (Mlg/2) sin θ. Balancing the torques on the right stick 
(around the contact point with the ground) gives Ff = (Mrg/2) cos θ.
The condition Ff ≤ µN is therefore
1
Mr cos   M1 sin   tan2  

where we have used Ml/Mr = tan θ.
SECTION – A
19. 

PCl5  g 
 PCl3  g  Cl2  g 
4 x x x
Total moles at equilibrium = 4 + x + 2 = 6 + x
PV
n
RT
6.568  80
6x 
0.0821 800
6  x  8, x  2
2 2 2
PCl5   ,PCl3   .Cl2  
80 80 80
2 2

Kc  80 80  0.025
2
80
n
K P  K c  RT 
= 0.025 × 0.0821 × 800
= 1.642 atm
20. Bond angle of NH3 > Bond angle of NF3
21. B2O3  P2 O5 
 2BPO4
22. H
O
Cl
Cl C C H
Cl O
H
Chloral hydrate
23. 2KMnO4  5K 2C2 O4  8H2 SO4 

 2MnSO4  10CO2  6K 2 SO4  8H2 O
24. Zn  OH2  2NaOH 

 Na 2 ZnO2  2H2O
Soluble
Al  OH3  NaOH  NaAlO2  2H2O
 Soluble 
K sp
25.  Ag   3
PO34 
2.7  10 18
 3
0.1
= 3 × 10 – 6 M
K AgCl
26.  Cl   sp 
 Ag 
1.2  1010

3  10 6
 4  10 5
27. K p  PNH3  PH2S

0.36  PNH3  PH2S
PNH3  PH2S  0.6 atm
PNH3  PH2S  0.6  0.6  1.2 atm
28. (i) KP is constant at a given temperature.

(ii) Addition of inert gas at constant volume does not affect equilibrium.
1.8  1.8
29. K c  0.36, Qc  1
1.8  1.8


SO 2  g  NO2  g   SO3  g  NO  g 
1.8  x 1.8  x 1.8  x 1.8  x
2
1.8  x 
 Kc  2
1.8  x 
2
1.8  x  1.8  x
0.36  2
, 0.6 
1.8  x  1.8  x
 x  0.45
Number of mole of SO3 = 1.8 – 0.45 = 1.35
30. H3PO 4  NaOH  NaH2PO 4  H2 O

M.mole 2 4 0
0 2 2
NaH2PO4  NaOH  Na2HPO 4  H2 O
M.mole 2 2 0
0 0 2
pK a2  pK a3
pH of Na2HPO4 =
2
7.2  12.3
= = 9.75
2
Z2
31. KE = 13.6 ×
n2
32
 13.6   30.6 eV
22
2.303  A o
32. k log
t  A
2.303  6.93 0.1
t log
0.693 0.001
t = 46.06
Ea1 Ea 2
33. 
T1 T2
42 Ea
 2
500 450
Ea2  37.8 kJ
 x  37.80
 A o
34.  A   0.125  A o
23
0.125  A o
 % of A left   100  12.50
 A o
35. K 2Cr2 O7  4H2SO 4  3H2 C2O 4  6CO 2  7H2O  Cr2  SO4 3  K 2 SO 4
134.4 L of CO2 produced by K2Cr2O7 = 294 g
294
 5.6 L of CO2 produced by K2Cr2O7   5.6
134.4
= 12.25 g
1 2  1 1
36.  R  Z  2  2 
 1 2 
1 3
 
 R 4 
 4
1 1 1o
    911.7  A
R 3 3
o
  303.90 A
SECTION – A
1
37. ln  = lim [ln 1 + (ln 1 + ln 2) + (ln 1 + ln 2 + ln 3) + .....] –  ln n
n  n2
1 2 n n  n  1
nln   n  1 ln  .....  ln  lnn
n n n 2 n  1  2n 1 n n  1 r r
= lim 2
  lnn = lim lnn +  ln
n  n n  2n n r 1 n n
1
1 3
 
2
and ln  =  1  x  ln x dx   4
0
60
38. Let p = abc and q = [a] [b] [c]. So, q is an integer and p 
q
q  min{[a]bc, a[b]c, ab[c]} = 3  q  {1, 2, 3}
If q = 1  ab[c] < 4 but ab[c] = 5  no solution
60
If q = 3, as p  max{[a]bc, a[b]c, ab[c]} = 5 and p   no solution
q
 q = 2 and p = 30 . Since q is a product of 3 positive integer, we have 3 cases
2 120
If [a] = 2, then a  30   3  no solution
5 9
 30 30 30 
If [b] = 2, then solution is  , , 
 3 2 5 
 30 30 2 30 
If [c] = 2, then solution is  , , 
 3 4 5 
39. Let f(1) = a and f(1) = b, putting x = 1 in the given equation we get b = a2
Differentiating the equation and putting x = 1 gives 2ab + 8 = ab + 2ab  ab = 8
So, a = 2, b = 4
0 
sinnx sinnx
40. In   1  2x  sin x dx   dx
 0 1  2  sin x
x
  
sinnx sinnx sinnx
In   dx   dx =  dx [Putting –x for x in 1st integral]
0 1  2  sin x
x
0 1  2  sin x
x
0
sin x

sin  n  2  n  sinnx 
In 2  In   dn  2 cos n  1 x dx = 0 if n  N
0
sin x 0
 If n is even In = I0 = 0, and if n is odd In = I1 = 
41. Using LH-Rule twice, we get a = b = 2
42. lim
ln  2  x  1  1+ a+ b= 0
x 1 x 2  ax  b
2ln  2  x 
Using LH-Rule, we have lim  1  a + 2 = 0  a = –2, b = 1
x 1  x  2  2x  a 
43.
f  x
 1 
x
f t
dt 
 
f   x  1  x 2  f  x  2x

f  x
 f  x  
2x f  x 
 f x
2 2
1 x 2 2 2
1 x2
0 1 t
1  x  1 x
f  x 2x
 = 1  ln f(x) = x + ln(1 + x 2) + ln c  f(x) = cex(1 + x2)
f  x 1 x2
xf   g  x   g  x  g  f  x   f   x 
44. Given equation implies 
f  g x  g f  x 
d d

dx

lng  f  x    x
dx
  –2x
ln f  g  x    2x (as f(g(x)) = e ), 
2
 g(f(x)) = Ae x and g(f(0)) = 1  A = 1
45. Using integration by parts repeatedly


2018

 ln x    ln x 2018  
2018 ln x 
2017
2018 ln x 
 2017
 dx      2017x 2018 dx  dx
1 x 2018  2017x 2017  1
2017 1 x 2018
1

2018!  dx = 2018!
= ..... =  2018
 2017 2018 x
1
 2017 2019
1
2x332  x 998 4x1664 sin x 691
46. I  2 dx , (as is an odd function and rest of the integrand is even)
0 1  x666 1  x666
1 332
1  333
Put x  t 333  dx  t dt
333
332 998
1 332 1
2 2t 333  t 333 333 2 2  t2 2  
I  2
t dt =  2
dt =  1 
333 0 1 t 333 0 1  t 333  4 
SECTION – D
1
1   f  x 2 
47.  f  x  f   x  dx =  2   0  f(0) = f(1)
0
 0
1
1   f  x  3 
2
  f  x  f   x  dx = 
 3 
  18  f(1) = 3 and f(0) = –3
0
 0
48. Lines with slope 2 and passing through (0, 0) and (1, 1) are y = 2x and y – 1 = 2(x – 1)
respectively.
By the Mean Value theorem, no point of y-axis

form (x, f(x)) lies outside this parallelogram.
2x + y – 3 = 0
However, we can construct functions which
y = 2x
satisfy the given condition and are
y = –2x
arbitrarily close to the sides of the 3 3 2x – y – 1 = 0
parallelogram.  ,  (1, 1)
 4 2 x-axis
3
So, b – a = area of parallelogram = (0, 0)
4
 1 1
 , 
 4 2
1 1
2n 1 2n 1
1 Sn 1 S0
49. Let Sn  1 f  x  dx, then Sn  3 1 f  2x  dx  6  .....  6n
2n 2n
 n11 1

1 2 2n  2 1  S0
 f  x  dx  nlim

  f  x  dx   f  x  dx  .....   f  x   
 1 1 1  5
 1  S0 = 5
0
 2n 2n 1 2 
50. f(1– x) = 1 – f(x)  f k(1 – x) = 1 – fk(x)  k  N

1 1 1 1
f
2004
 x  dx   1  f 2004 1  x   dx = 1   f 2004 1  x  dx  1   f 2004  x  dx (Put 1 – x for x)
0 0 0 0
p  7  1
51. If x1, x2, x3 and x4 are the root of p then   0 (as 7 is not a root of p(x))
p 7 7  xi
1 1 1 1 89
     0  x4 
7  1 7  3 7  5 7  x4 11
  1 1/3  1 1/3 1/3

 1  1
52. L = lim xp
x 
 x  11/3
  x  1
1/3

 2x1/3 = lim t  p    1    1  2    , (putting x  )
t 0  t
  t  t   t
1 5
p 2 p 
= lim t
t0
3
1  t 
1/3 1/3
 1  t   1/n
 2 =  t 3 (using expansion for 1  x  )
9
5 2
 p ,L  
3 9
 
d tx d  1  1
53.  e f  x  dx   x etx f  x  dx   sin1  t   =
dt  
dt   2    1 
2
1  t  
 2

Putting t = 0,  x f  x  dx  2

54. The tangent at (x, f(x)) meets the y-axis at (0, f(x) –1)
1
 f(x) =  f(x) = ln x + c and f(1) = 0  c = 0
x
*****
PART TEST – I
PAPER-2
1. C, D 19. A, B, C 37. C, D
2. A, B 20. A, C 38. B, D
3. C, D 21. C, D 39. A, B, C
4. A, B, C 22. A, B, C 40. A, B, C, D
5. A, B, C, D 23. A, C 41. A, B, D
6. A, C 24. C, D 42. A, B, C, D
7. C 25. B 43. D
8. A 26. D 44. C
9. A 27. B 45. B
10. B 28. A 46. D
11. 00002.00 29. 00046.06 47. 00000.25
12. 00005.00 30. 00015.50 48. 00000.50
13. 00001.00 31. 00004.74 49. 00000.50
14. 00002.00 32. 00005.27 50. 00001.50
15. 00003.00 33. 00028.04 51. 00000.40
16. 00002.00 34. 01215.60 52. 00000.50
17. 00006.00 35. 00115.15 53. 00000.25
18. 00002.00 36. 02763.60 54. 00000.50
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
1. Since the rod is raised slowly (quasi- F cos 

F
statically), the entire system remains in
equilibrium at any moment in time. Thus, F sin 
the torque about the point of rotation of the
rod is zero about any axis, and the net
N
external forces are 0. Ffric = F sin θ 
 mg
mglcos  mgcos  fk
  Fl   0  F 
2 2 
N = mg – F cos θ
The F sin θ force causes the rod’s bottom end to slip in one direction. The friction force counters
this force to stop the slipping
when Ffric = μsN  F sin θ. Hence,
F sin  sin  cos 
s  
mg  F cos  2  cos 2 
Maximum of µs can be found by setting its derivative with respect to theta equal to zero:
d  2  cos   2cos   1  2cos  1  cos  
2 2 2 2
1 2
 2
 0 This gives sin   and min 
d  2  cos  
2
3 4
2. First consider the situation immediately after the perfectly inelastic collision between B and C but
before A has begun to slip onto C; label this as the initial configuration “i.” Clearly v Ai = v and vBi =
vCi = v/2 by momentum conservation. On the other hand, in the end (labeled “f”) all three masses
have the same final speed, so that v Af = v Bf = vCf = 2v/3 by again applying momentum
conservation. The sum of the kinetic energies of the boards thus changes by
ΔK = (KAf + KBf + KCf) – (KAi + KBi + KCi) = (mv2/12) …(1)
where m is the mass of each board. This net loss in mechanical energy is the result of the non
L
conservative “internal work” done by friction, WNC    fdx A   fdx C   0 fd  x A  x C  …(2)
where the equal and opposite internal force of friction between blocks A and C is given by
f = µkN = µk mg(xA-xC)/L …(3)
with L the length of each board. Here, xA and xC are the rightward displacements of blocks A and
C from their initial positions; the ratio (x A – xC)/L thus gives the fraction of block A, which is on top
of block C, and hence the ratio of the normal force N of A on C to the weight mg of A. Substitute
Eq. (3) into Eq. (2) to find
 mg L2 …(4)
WNC  K
L 2
It is worth pausing to note that it would have been extremely difficult to attempt to separately
calculate the two frictional work terms in the middle expression in Eq. (2)! Finally equate the right-
hand sides of Eqs. (1) and (4) to obtain the answer,
v2
L
6 k g
v1  v 2
3. e=1= …(i)
2 2g
Momentum conservative m
M
M 2g  m 2g  mv1  Mv 2 …(ii) v2 v1
2g 2g
Solving (i) and (ii) Before After
 3M  m  collision collision
v1    2gL  5gl
 Mm 
M 5 2
   1.82 =1.82
m 3 2 5
4. Since the normal force on the top mass is zero and the horizontal
acceleration of the top mass is zero at the instant it loses con-tact with N
y r
the wall, the tension in the rod at that moment must be zero. Thus, mg
free-body diagrams for the two masses are as sketched below
Therefore, the top mass has downward velocity v = – dy/dt and x
mg
acceleration g = – d 2y/dt2,
While the bottom mass has rightward velocity u = dx/dt and zero acceleration. But y = (r2-x2)1/2.
dy x dx xu
v  
dt r  x dt
2 2 y
d2 y u dx xu dy u2 xuv
g     2
dt 2 y dt y 2 dt y y
1
mg  r  y   m u2  v 2 
2
 x2  u 2r 2
 2g  r  y   u2  1  2    gy
 y  y2
2 8gr
y r  u 
3 27
5. According to Newton’s third law, the force Fsp that the system (s) exerts on the pivot (p) is
opposite to the force Fps that the pivot exerts on the system, Fsp = –Fps. Then, we can use
Newton’s second law to first deduce Fps and so to obtain the required force Fsp. The physical
situation is represented in the figure below.
y Fps
F

Fnet
x

mg D
2mg
CM  3
acm
mg
Applying Newton’s second law to the system:

Fnet = M acm , (1)
where Fnet indicates the sum of all external forces on the system, acm indicates the acceleration of
the center of mass of the system, and M is the total mass of the system that is M = 2m because
the mass of the “light rod” is neglected. In the present
case Fnet is the sum of the gravitational force on the two spheres and the force Fps that exerts
the pivot:
Fnet = M g + Fps. (2)
The force Fps can be deduced from Eqs. (1) and (2):
Fps = M acm – M g. (3)
Then, to obtain Fps it is necessary to have acm. We note that just after the system is released, the
acceleration of the center of mass is tangent to the circular trajectory that the center of mass will
follow during its oscillation around the pivot (the pivot is the suspension point and the system will
behave as a physical pendulum). It allows us to relate the magnitude of this tangential
acceleration with the magnitude of the angular acceleration a of the system:
acm = α D, (4)
where D is the distance between the pivot and the center of mass. From the figure,
10
D l (5)
2
Equation (4) is only valid just after the system is released at t = 0, because for t > 0 the system
will also have a centripetal acceleration pointing to the pivot. The angular acceleration a is
obtained by using Newton’s second law in “its rotational version.” We have:
net  I (6)
where τnet has to be measured with respect to an axis that passes through the pivot and is
perpendicular to the vertical plane when the system is contained. Since the weight of the upper
mass is the only force that produces a torque, the magnitude of this torque can be found as:
τnet = mgl (7)
Here I is the moment of inertia of the system with respect to the same axis:
I = 10 m2 (8)
where we have neglected the moment of inertia of the two arms that the light rod forms, due to
the assumption mrod << m. Combining Eqs. (6), (7), and (8) we obtain
α = g/10l (9)
g
acm  (10)
10 2
  3 1 
acm   i  j g
 10 20 
  3 1   3 19 
Fps  2mg  i j  g  2mg   j   mg  i  j
 20 20   10 20 
6. Consider a moment when the center of top the cylinder has moved

down a distance xT and the center of the bottom cylinder has moved 2R
to the right a distance xB. At this moment, the cylinders are moving 2R  xT
with speeds v T and v B, respectively. From Fig. , v T and v B,
respectively. From Fig., xB
xT = 2R(1-cosθ)
Also, energy conservation gives:
 v 2  v T2 
m B   mgxT  2mgR 1  cos  
 2 
2 2
x B 2   2R  x T    2R 
Differentiating w.r.t. time
vT = vBxB/(2R – xT) = vB tan θ.
Eliminating v T from the energy conservation equation gives v B2 = 4gR(1 – cos θ)/(1 + tan2θ).
Setting the derivative with respect to θ equal to zero gives
cos θm = 2/3
for the angle θm at which vB is maximum. At this point, the speed of the bottom cylinder is
16gR
vB  .
27
Mathematically, it appears that the speed decreases after θm. However, for this to happen, the
acceleration and, therefore, the horizontal force must be directed to the left (negative) for angles
greater than θm. But the contact force on the bottom cylinder by the top cylinder cannot be
directed to the left. Therefore, the bottom cylinder loses contact with the top one and moves off at
16gR
the maximum speed of vB 
27
7. Basic concept of collision
8. Taking torque about point A

2
N  2     h   fs    h 
2 fs
N 2     h
 fs   N
h N
2 2
      h   2    h 
2
2 fs N N

  2  2  1    h   F2

    h 
2
 1 A F1
 1 
 h   1    hmax  2m
 1  2  mg
fs = 3 N
N  4N
FH = 5 N.
g
9. (P) a   3, 4
3 3
g g
(Q) a  2
3 3 3
(R) 5
g
(S) a  1
3
  M 2  A
10. Mg  mg     m 2  
2  3  B
M  
 2  m  g 40 mg
   rad / s2 mg
M
  m   3
3 
 40 
mg  F1  m   1
 3 
40 10
i.e. F1   10 
3 3
 20   40 
Mg  mg  FH  M    m  
 3   3 
40
 40 
3
160
70  FH 
3
160 50
FH  70  
3 3
SECTION – D
11. a1 cos[90  (   )]  a2 sin 

a1 sin(   )  a2 sin  …(i)
Conservation has no acceleration x direction  90  (  )
 Ma2 = ma1 sin  …(ii)
From (i) and (ii)
m sin(   )  
 sin  
M sin 
m tan   tan 
 
M tan 
m tan 60  tan30
 2
M tan30
5v o
12. (Apply conservation of energy)
2
13. Because the block does not accelerate off the plane surface, the y
normal force N that the surface exerts on the block (of mass m) f
must balance the component of the block’s weight perpendicular to i
the plane, so that N =mg cos θ, and thus the kinetic frictional force x 
O
is f k = µk mg cos θ. On the other hand, the following sketch shows
the path of the block (between its initial position “i” and final position
“f ”) and the components of the forces acting on it in the plane of the
incline. I have chosen coordinates with x down the incline and y O
perpendicular to it. A tangent to the block’s path makes angle f with
mg sin 
respect to the x-direction, with φi = α . (It is interesting to note that φ
must be zero because the block’s final speed and hence its final
centripetal acceleration must approach zero, which can only
happen if the frictional force points up the plane, opposite the
weight component down the plane.)
Newton’s second law in the x-direction, after dividing both sides by the block’s mass, becomes
dv x
 gsin   k gcos  cos  (1)
dt
where u is the block’s speed, with initial value u0. Writing down the y-component of Newton’s
second law introduces sin , which leads to a mess. A better choice is to instead write down the
tangential component of Newton’s second law (noting that any direction other than x would give
an independent equation),
dv
 gsin  sin   k gcos  (2)
dt
Solve Eq. (1) for cos φ (which is the only time-dependent quantity on the right-hand side of these
two equations) and substitute it into Eq. (2) to get
dv dv
k  gcos   tan2    k 2   tan  x
dt dt
after simplifying. Now integrate both sides over the time t from the initial to the final point to obtain
 k  0  v 0   gcos   tan2    k 2  t  tan   0  v o cos  
v o  k  tan  cos  
t
gcos   k 2  tan2 
14. The rolled part of the carpet is a cylinder, and its mass is
proportional to x. Applying conservation of mechanical
2
 1 1  dx  x sin 
 1    x       x  g
energy,  2  2  dt  2 
2
 dx  2 2gx sin 
  v 
 dt
  3
g
acarpet 
i.e. 3.
For the cylinder,
3
mv 2  mgx sin 
4
2g
acyl 
i.e. 3
t1 acyl
  2
t2 acarpet
15. Maximum trajectory area

Let  be the angle at which the ball is thrown. Then coordinates are given by x = (v cos )t and y
gt 2
= (v sin )t  . The total time in air is 2(v sin )/g, so the area under the trajectory, A = ydx, is
2
x max 2v sin  / g
 gt 2  2v 4
0 ydx  0  (v sin  )t  (v cos  dt)  sin3  cos 
2  3g2
Taking the derivative of this, we find that the maximum occurs when tan  = 3 that is, when  =
3V 4
60. The maximum area is then A max  . Note that by dimensional analysis we know that
8g2
v4
the area, which has dimensions of distance squared, must be proportional to .
g2
16. Circling around a pole

Let F be the tension in the string. At the mass, the angle between the string and the radius of the
dotted circle is  = sin1(r/R). In terms of , the radial and tangential F = ma equations are
mv 2 dv
Fcos   , and F sin  = m …(i)
R dt
Dividing these two equations gives tan  = (Rv)/v 2. Separating variables and integrating gives
v
dv tan  t
  dt
v0 v2 R 0
1
1 1 (tan )t  1 (tan )t 
    v(t)     …(ii)
v0 v R  v0 R 
The speed v becomes infinite when
R
tT …(iii)
v 0 tan 
This means that you can keep the mass moving the desired circle only up to time T. After that, it
is impossible. (Of course, it will become impossible, for all practical purposes, long before v
becomes infinite.) The total distance d = vdt, is infinite, because this integral diverges (barely,
like a log) as t approaches T.
17. Let’s figure out what the collision looks like in the CM frame. If M has initial speed V in the lab
frame, then the CM moves with speed VCM = MV /(M +m). The speeds of M and m in the CM
frame therefore equal, respectively,
mV MV U
U = V  VCM = , and u =  VCM 
Mm Mm  u
In the CM frame, the collision is simple. The particles keep the U 
same speeds, but simply change their directions (while still moving u
in opposite directions), as shown in Figure.
The angle θ is free to have any value. This scenario clearly satisfies Vlab
conservation of energy and momentum, so it must be what happens.
The important point to note is that since θ can have any value, the tip
VCM U
of the U velocity vector can be located anywhere on a circle of radius
U. If we then shift back to the lab frame, we see that the final velocity
of M with respect to the lab frame, Vlab, is obtained by adding VCM to
the vector U, which can point anywhere on the dotted circle in Figure.
A few possibilities for Vlab are shown. The largest angle of deflection mV
is obtained when Vlab is tangent to the dotted circle, in which case we Mm
max
have the situation shown in Figure.
MV
Mm
The maximum angle of deflection, φmax, is therefore given by

U mV / (M  m) m
sin max   
VCM MV / (M  m) M
If M < m, then the dotted circle passes to the left of the left vertex of the triangle. This means that
φ can take on any value. In particular, it is possible for M to bounce directly backward.
18. s = the arc length OP. Y
T cos   T0 …(1)
s T
T sin     s  g …(2)  P(x, y) X
T0 O
dy dy  g 
 tan       s …(3)
dx dx  T0 
dy  ds sin  
Further:  …(4)
dx  ds cos  
Substituting and Solving, we get,
T  T0  gy …(5)
2
 sg 
And, T 2  T02    …(6)
 2 
Using these and T = gs, we get,
2  4h2
S  s  , y  h 
8h
Alternative Solution:
It can be shown that the difference between the tensions in the rope at two arbitrary points on it
(denoted by A and B), e.g. the centre and the right-hand pulley, depends only on the height
difference between the points and the linear mass density  of the rope. In an obvious notation:
FB − FA = g(hB − hA).
To prove this, consider the energy changes that would be involved if a small length of rope were
(notionally) cut out from the neighbourhood of point A and inserted close to point B.
Any arbitrary piece of the rope is in equilibrium, and so the horizontal component of the tension in
the rope between the pulleys is constant (equal to F1, say). The vertical component changes from
point to point; it is zero in the middle, and at the pulleys is equal to half the weight of the ‘sagging’
section, namely (/2)g, where λ is the linear mass density of the rope.
As illustrated in figure, we imagine a small F2
(g)/2
piece of the rope, of length , cut out from
the middle of the system, and re-inserted
F1
into the rope near one of the pulleys! What
energy changes are involved?
Closing the gap in the middle of the rope h F2
requires work F1Δl to be done, while the /2
work required to lift the small piece against
F1 (g)/2
gravity is λ Δl gh. Inserting it at the pulley
actually allows some energy to be 
recovered, but formally the work required
to do this is −F2 Δl.
As a result of these changes, we have done no more than return the rope to its initial state! It
follows that the total work done must be zero, and so
F1 Δl + λ Δl gh − F2 Δl = 0,
showing that
F2 − F1 = λgh.
The same thought experiment could have been carried out for any arbitrary pair of points on the
rope, and so it is generally true that ‘the difference in tension forces at two arbitrary points of the
rope is directly proportional to the height difference between those points’.
As can be seen in Fig. 1, the connection between the rope tension F2 (at the pulley) and its
components is
2
  lg 
F2 2  F12   
 2 
A third equation, one that involves s, can be established by recognising that the hanging rope
segments are each held in place by a force of strength F2:
F2 = λgs.
From equations (1) and (3), we have that F1 = λg(s − h). Substituting this into (2) gives the final
result for the length of the hanging segments as
l 2  4h 2
s
8h
SECTION – A
19. Increase in concentration of the reactant shifts the equilibrium in the forward direction and vice
versa.
20. 2-Ethylanthraquinol on oxidation in air produces H2O2.

Acetanilide retards the decomposition of H2O2.
21. SF3Cl – Seesaw

In PCl2F3, two F atoms are in axial position and one F atom in equatorial position.
22. B3N3H6  9H2O  3NH3  3H3BO3  3H2
2n
23. General formula of cyclic silicate is  SiO3 n
24. The correct order are

Li < K < Na < Rb (Density)
Be(OH)2 < Mg(OH)2 < Ca (OH)2 (Basic nature)
25. sp3 – F2SeO, NF4 ,

sp2 = NO3
sp3d = SF2Cl2
sp3d2 = IOF4 , XeF5
26. (P) 10 ml 0.1 M H2SO4 + 40 ml 0.1 M NH4OH

2 / 50
pOH = pKb + log  4.74
2 / 50
pH = 9.26 basic buffer solution
(Q) 20 ml 0.1 M CH3COOH + 16 ml 0.1 M NaOH

1.6
pH  4.74  log  5.34
0.4
Acidic buffer solution.
(R) 50 ml 0.1 M CH3COOH + 50 ml 0.1 M NaOH

4.74 1 5
pH = 7   log  8.72
2 2 100
(S) 10 ml 0.1 M NH4OH + 20 ml 0.1 M NH4Cl
2
pOH = 4.74  log  5.04
1
pH = 14 – 5.04 = 8.96
1
27. P → Order of the reaction 
2
Q → 1st order reaction.
R → zero order reaction
nd
S → 2 order reaction.
28.  4Al  OH3  3CH4

Al4 C3  12H2 O 
 2Mg  OH2  C3H4
Mg2 C3  4H2 O 
CaC2  4H2 O  Ca  OH2  C2H4
SECTION – D
2.303 a
29. t log
k ax
2.303 20
 log
5  10 2 2
= 46.06
30. Kp = PCO2
0.3  12.315
n  0.045 (n = number of moles of CO2 at equilibrium)
0.0821 1000
 Mole of CaCO3 = 0.2 – 0.045 = 0.155
Wt. of CaCO3 = 0.155 × 100 = 15.50
31. 2HCl Ba  OH2  BaCl2  2H2 O

5 5 0 0
0 2.5 5
2.5
2CH3 COOH Ba  OH2   CH3 COO 2 Ba  2H2 O
10 2.5 0
5 0 2.5
CH3 COO 
pH = pKa + log
CH3COOH
5
pH = 4.74 + log = 4.74
5
h
32. x 
4m V
6.625  10 27

4  3.14  10 12  108
 0.527  10 7  5.27  10 8 cm
o
= 5.27 A
33. Mol. Wt. of MClx = At. Wt. of M + 35.5x

2 × 85.02 = (Eq. wt. × x) + 35.5x
2  85.02
x 4
7.01  35.5
 At. Wt. = 7.01 × 4 = 28.04
1 1 1
34.  R  Z2  2  2 
  n1 n2 
1 1 1
 R 4  2  2 
 2 4 
1 3
 R 4 
  16 
1 4 4
    911.7  A o
R 3 3
o
  1215.60A
2.303  34.65 100

35. t log
0.693 10
= 115.15 min.
36. Go  2.303RT logK P

= - 2.303 × 2 × 300 × log 10-2
= 2763.60 cal
SECTION – A
mn
cosn x  mn cosm x
37. We may assume m > n  lim
x 0 x2
lim
cosn x  cosm x
 lim

cosn x 1  cosm n x 
2
x 0  mn 1 mn 1  x 0 mn x

x 2  mn cosn x

  .....  mn cosm x  

 lim 

1  cosm n x 1  cos x  1  cos x  .....  cos
m n 1

mn
 lim

1  cos x m  n

x 0 mn x 2 mn x 2 mn x  x2 2mn
 x  1  x3  3x2  5x  1 e x
38. g  x   3
x 2

1
Now, x3 – 3x2 + 5x + 1 is strictly increasing and has a root in (–1, 0)
f  x  ; 2  x   1

 f  1 ; 1  x  0
39. g x  
f  0  ; 0  x 1
f  x  ; x2

f  2, 1 f 1, 2 
40. We see that f(1, 1) = 1 and f(1, 2) = 1  and f  2, 1  1 
2 2
So, f(1, 2) = f(2, 1) = 2, then f(3, 1) = f(1, 3) = 3
 f(x, y) = x·y; xy  0
41. Since the slope of tangent is 1

1  x2 dy
We have 2
  1  x4 – 3x2 = 0  x = 0,  3
dx
1 x2

 3 3
Now, x = 0, y = 0; x = 3,y= ;x=  3 ,y=
2 2
42. Given f(x = y) = f(x) + f(y) + xyf(x + y)

Put x = y = 0  f(0) = 0
Put y = –x  f(–x) = –f(x)  f(x) is odd
f  x  h  f  x   f h  
and f   x   lim = lim   x  x  h    f(0) = 0
h0 h h 0
 h 
2
 f(0) + x
2  1  1
f(x) = x – 1  f is differentiable f(3) = 8 and f   x   f     f   x   f     x  0
x
  x
43. (P) If the lim x  f   x  exist

x 
So, the lim  x  f  x  

x 
 x   f(x) + lim x  f   x 
x 
  x f  x   x  f x
 lim  x  f  x    lim
  lim  lim f  x 
x  x  x x  x x 
So, lim f  x   lim f  x   lim x  f   x   0

x  x  x 
e      1
f x g x
e   e  
f x g x
g x   
(Q) lim ; lim e use L.H. Rule
x a f  x   g  x  x  f  x  g x
 f  x  g1
ga e   f   x   g  x  
e  ; ega  eln 2 = 2
 f   x   g  x  
(R) Replacing f by f if necessary, we may assume f(b) > f(c) hence f(a) > f(c)
So  be an absolute minimum of f on [a, b] which exists became the function is continuous
then   (a, b) and therefore f() = 0
x b
b
ea  e x ab ab ab
(S) I   dx put t   x we have dx  2 dt
a
x x t t
ab bt b t b t
a a b
e at  e ab  ab  e t  ea e t  ea
I
ab
   2  dt ; I    dt  =  t  dt  I  I = 0
b  t  b
t a
t

x2
44. (P) Let  dx (replace x by –x)
 1  sin x  1  sin2 x
 
x2 2
 1 1 
I  1  sin x  dx ; 2I  x    dx
2 2
 1  sin2 x   1  sin x  1  sin x 1  sin x  1  sin x 
  3
2 2 
=  x dx ; 2I  2 x dx ; I 
3
 0
1 1 dx dy  1
(Q) Let y  , dy   2 dx then 2  2 ; tan1 x  tan1 y  ; tan1 ; cot–1 x
x x x  x 1 y  y 1 2 x
  
2 2  tan1 y  2
1 tan1 x  dx 2 3
  2 dx   2 2  = =
 x2  x  1 18
2  1/2 x  x  1 1/2 y  y  1   4 1/2

 
cos x sin x
 /2  2
(R)  x x dx ; Put sin x  t
2
0  sin x  x
1  
 x 
2/ 
x cos x  sin x dt
 tan1 x  ; tan1 2  
2/ 
dx  dt ;  1 t2 ;  1
x2 1
 4
(S) As function is odd
45. (P) |ex| = (0, )  x  R ; {|ex|}  [0, 1) ; [{|ex|}]  f(x) is constant i.e. many one
sgn  x  2
(Q) f  x   e  ex ;
x=0 f(0) = 2
2
x>0 f(x) = e + e x
1 2
x<0 f(x) =  ex
e
 f(x) is many one
46. (P) f(x) = x – x2 + sin–1 x, x  [–1, 1]

f(x)  0,  x  [–1, 0], f(x)  0  x  [0, 1]
0 1
 
A    sin1 x  x  x 2 dx   sin1 x  x  x 2 dx  
1 0
=  1
(Q) Area will be minimum if (0, 2) is mid-point of chord
(R) 1  |X| + |Y|  2 Y
 1
A  4 2    6
 2
X
(2, 0)
(1, 0)
k
k 2 1 
2 x2  k2 1
(S) A   x  kx 
  dx  2

k  1 
0   2
6 k 1 
6  k2  2  2 
k

 
By A.M.  G.M. equality holds k = 1
SECTION – D
1
1 1 1 n 1
47. Taking log   1   lnn  2   k lnk   xln x   4
2 n n k 1 0
1

L= e 4
48. Area of rectangle is a(a2 + 1) = a3 + a the portion

a 2
a3 (a, a + 1)

under the parabola has area  x 2  1 dx  a  (0, a2 + 1)
0
3
(0, 1)
So,
a 3
a a
3
a
2 3
(a, 0)
a= 3
1 1
49. Let g: A  A be defined by g(x) = 1  , then g(g(g(x))) = 1  x
x 1
1
1
1
x
So, given equation rewrites as f(x) + f(g(x)) = log|x| ..... (1)
Now, put x = g(y)
f(g(y)) + f(g(g(y))) = log |g(y)| ..... (2)
Again put in equation (1) x = (g(g(z)))
f(g(g(z))) + (f(g(g(g(z)))) = log|(g(g(z)))| ..... (3)
Now, set y = z = x and by solving these equation (1), (2) and (3), we get
1
 
f  x   log x  log g  x   log g  g  x  
2

put x = 2007, we have
2006 1
g x   , g  g  x   
2007 2006
 2007 
So, that f(2007) = log  
 2006 
50. Let f(x) = x(4 – x), and y = k

Let A be the region below y = f(x) and above y = k
and B be the region below y = k and above y = f(x)
then F(k) = A + B y=k
k 4

A  2   f 1  x  dx   2  f 1  x  dx 
 
0 k 
0 x=2 4
dA dA
dk
 
 2 f 1  k   2  f 1  k  ,
dk
0
f –1(k) = 1  k = 3
51. Clearly 0, 2 are fixed points of f and therefore solution.
On the other hand, then is no solution for x < 0, since f is non-negative valued
For 0 < x < 2, we have 0  f(x) < x < 2 and f(0) = 0
For x > 2, f(x) > x so there is no other solution
52. Let h(x) = x(1 + ln(x)); h: [1, )  [1, )
h(x) is strictly increasing and h(1) = 1, lim h  x   
x 
Hence, h(x) is Bijective
So inverse of h(x) clearly f: [1, )  [1, );   f()
1
Now, f   x  
2  ln  f    
1
f   f  
By using L. Hospital rule lim  lim
   1 1

ln   2  ln   
f  2  ln f   
= lim   2  lnf  x   = lim 1
   1  ln f   
1
53.  x5  x2  x6  2x3  3 dx ; x6 + 2x3 = t; (6x5 + 6x2) dx = dt
1 4 4
dt 1 3 3 1 6
 t3    t c =
6 6 4 8
x  2x3   3 c
54. F(x) = –cos(sin(sin(sin (x))))

For integration put  = sin(sin(sin (x)))
*****
FIITJEE
PART TEST – II
JEE (Advanced)-2018-19
PAPER –1
TEST DATE: 18-11-2018

General Instructions:
 The test consists of total 54 questions.
 Each subject (PCM) has 18 questions.
 This question paper contains Three Parts.
 Part-I is Physics, Part-II is Chemistry and Part-III is Mathematics.
 Each Part is further divided into Two Sections: Section-A & Section-C.
Section-A (01– 07, 19 – 25, 37 - 43) contains 21 multiple choice questions which have one or
more than one correct answer. Each question carries +4 marks for correct answer and –2 mark
for wrong answer
Partial Marks +1 for each correct option provided no incorrect options is selected.
Section-A (08 – 13, 26 – 31, 44 - 49) contains 18 questions. Each of 2 Tables with 3 Columns and
4 Rows has three questions. Column 1 will be with 4 rows designated (I), (II), (III) and (IV).
Column 2 will be with 4 rows designated (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv). Column 3 will be with 4 rows
designated (P), (Q), (R) and (S).
Each question has only one correct answer and carries +3 marks for correct answer and –1 mark
for wrong answer.
Section-C (14 – 18, 32 – 36, 50 - 54) contains 15 Numerical based questions with answer as
numerical value from 0 to 9 and each question carries +3 marks for correct answer. There is no
negative marking.
AITS-PT-II (Paper-1)-PCM-JEE(Advanced)/19 2
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
(More Than One Correct Type)
This section contains 7 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) for
its answer, out of which ONE OR MORE is/are correct.
 Z
1. 
The electric field in the space is given by E  E0 xiˆ  yjˆ  zkˆ . 
Consider a right circular cylindrical surface whose radius is ‘a’
and height ‘h’, as shown in the figure.
Now choose the correct option(s).
Y
X O
(A) The electric flux through lower circular base is zero.
(B) The electric flux through upper circular top is a2hE0
(C) The electric flux through lateral surface is 2a2hE0
(D) The total electric flux through cylindrical surface is 4a2hE0
Ans. A, B, C
Sol. Let, S1, S2 and S3 be the surface areas of the lower circular base, upper circular top and lateral
surface of the cylinder respectively.
 
1   E.dS  0 …(1)
S1
 
2   E.dS  a2hE0 …(2)
S2
   
3   E.dS  E0  r .dS …(3)
S3 S3
   xiˆ  yjˆ  x2  y 2
 
r .dS  xiˆ  yjˆ  zkˆ . 
 a   dS 
a
dS
 
Putting this value in equation (3), we have
3  aE0  dS  aE0  2ah  2a 2hE0
S3
  Total flux  1  2  3  3 a2hE0
Second Method
  
 E   3E 0     30E0
0 0
Qen  Total charge enclosed within the cylinder = a2h
3 AITS-PT-II (Paper-1)-PCM-JEE(Advanced)/19
 3 a2h0E0
Q
Total flux = en  3a2hE0
0
2. Consider two current carrying loops in x-y plane, carrying current I1 and I2 respectively as shown
in the figure.
y
D
A C x
B I2
I1
Loop-2
Loop-1
Now consider two arbitrary elementary current elements AB & CD of lengths d 1 and d 2 on the
 
loop-1 and loop-2 respectively. Let dF12 be the force which the current carrying element I2 d 2
 
exerts on the current carrying element I1d 1 & F12 represent the net force on 1st loop by the 2nd

loop, developed due to interaction between current carrying loops. Similarly dF21 be the force
  
which the current carrying element I1 d 1 exerts on the current carrying element I2 d 2 & F21
represent the net force on 2nd loop by the 1st loop, developed due to interaction between current
carrying loops. Choose the correct option(s)
  
(A) dF12  dF21  0
  
(B) dF12  dF21  0
  
(C) F12  F21  0
  
(D) F12  F21  0
Ans. B, C

Sol. dB12  Magnetic field at any point on the elementary element AB due to current carrying element

I2d 2 .
 
 0  I2 d   r12 
dB12  
4  r12 3 

  
  
dF12  I1d 1  dB12  

 0  I1d 1  I2 d 2  r12 
 3
 4  r12
 
The force dF12 will be in the plane of loop and perpendicular to the current carrying element I1d i
(say along p̂12 ).
  

Similarly dF21 

0 I2 d 2  I1d 1  r21  [Say along p̂21 ]
3
4 r21
 p̂12 is not parallel to p̂21 , in general

  
So, dF12  dF21  0
  

But F12 
 0I1I2 
d 1  d 2  r12 
4 L L 3
r12
1 2
  

F21 
 0I1I2 
d 2  d 1  r21 .
4 L L1  r 3
21
 2  
Hence, F12  F21  0
3. Consider an isolated sphere of radius ‘b’, made of a material with permittivity 0 and electrical
conductivity , whose volume charge density varies with time t and is given as
 e  t /  if 0  r  a
 0
 0 if a  r  

Where   0 and 0 < a < b. The spherical layer between radii ‘a’ and ‘b’ is neutral. Then choose

the correct option(s).
a3 0
(A) The surface charge density at outer surface of sphere is at t   n2.
8b2
(B) The total current in the region 0 < r < a increases with the radius.
(C) The electric field in the region b < r <  is independent of time.
(D) The total current in the region a < r < b is independent of radius.
Ans. B, C, D
 4 3 t / 
 a 0 e  Q0 e t /  if 0ra
Sol. Q t   3
 0 if a r b
4 3
Here Q0  a 0
3
According Gauss’ Law, we can write
 Q0 r e  t / 
 3
if 0  r  a
 40 a
 t / 
Q e
E   0 2 if a  r  b
 40 r
 Q
0
 2
if b  r  
 40 r
Using conservation of charge we can write surface charge density at the outer surface of sphere
as,
Q  Q t Q0
 0
4 b 2

4b2

1  e t /  
1
If t   n2  1  e  n2  ,
2
3
4 3 1 1 a 0
So,   a 0   
3 4b2 2 6b2
J = current density = E
I = current = Jr2
Hence in the region 0  r  a, the volume is source of conduction current while the region a < r <
b has no source of conduction current.
4. The variation of potential along x-axis is shown in the figure. The potential does not vary along
the y-axis or z-axis. Ignore the behaviour at the end points of interval. Now choose the correct
option(s) for given interval –3m < x < 3m.
Vx(in volt)
b
15
e
10
5 c d
X(metre)
–3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3
–5
a –10
(A) The greatest absolute value of Ex is 25 V/m.
(B) An electron is released at point (– 1m, 0), it will move along positive x-axis.
(C) A proton is released at point (1.5 m, 0), it will move along positive x-axis.
(D) An electron is released at point (– 2.5 m, 0), it will move along positive x-axis.
Ans. A, D
Sol. Ex
10/3
x
–3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3
–25
5. Three point charges are kept at points A(0, 4a), O(0, 0)

and B(0, –4a) as shown in the figure. A(0, 4a) 5Q
–5Q
X
O P(3a, 0)
(0, –4a)B
+3Q
(A) Work was done on the external agent who assembled these charges in moving them
from infinity to the point.

(B) The electric field at point P is Ep  E X î  E y ˆj, then Ex is negative and Ey is positive.

(C) The electric field at point P is Ep  E x î  E y ˆj, then both Ex and Ey are negative.
975Q
(D) A positive charge has to be put at point P to make the potential energy of system
8
of all four point charges to be zero.
Ans. A, C
Sol. Potential energy of the system is negative so option A E3

is correct
5KQ KQ 3KQ
  53, E1  , E2  , E3  
9 5 25
5KQ KQ 3 3KQ 3 5KQ 24KQ E1 
Ex         0
9 5 5 25 5 9 125
K 4 3K 4 8K
Ey      0 E2
5 5 25 5 125
25Q2 15Q2 5xQ 5Qx 15Q2 3Qx
     0
4 8 5 3 4 5
65Q2 8Qx 5Qx  24  25  x 65Q 65  15Q
  0    x
8 5 3 15 8 8
6. In the circuit shown in figure, the switch S is closed at the moment t C R

= 0. At the moment t = RCn2, the currents through both resistors
are found to be ‘I’. Then choose the correct option(s)
L R
V
(A) I
R
V
(B) I
2R
L
(C) R
2C
L
(D) R
C
Ans. B, D
V  
Rt
V  RCt
Sol. I1   1  e
 , and
L
I2  e
R  R
According to question at t = RCn2, we have
Rt Rt t
V  V  RCt
  
I1  I2   1  e
  L
e  1  e L
 e RC
…………..( 1)
R  R
t
 1
Given t = RCn2  e RC  e n2  , Putting this value in equation (1), we have
2
L
R
C
Rt Rt
 1  1 Rt R
1 e L   e L    n2   RCn2  n2
2 2 L L
7. A loop is formed by two fixed parallel conductors connected

by a solenoid with inductance L = 2H and a conducting rod of
mass m = 8 kg which can freely slide without friction, over the
conductors. The conductors are located in a horizontal plane v0 x
and in a uniform vertical magnetic field B =  Tesla directed
into the plane of the paper. The distance between the
conductors is  = 2 m. At the moment t = 0, the rod is
imparted an initial velocity v 0 = 2 m/s directed to the right. The
resistance of loop is negligible. Choose the correct option( s)
(A) The rod will perform periodic motion, but not SHM
(B) The rod will perform SHM
(C) The time period of oscillation of rod is 4 s
4
(D) The amplitude of oscillation of rod is metre.

Ans. B, C, D
Sol. Suppose that at any instant of time, velocity of the rod is v i d

a
towards right.
The current in the circuit is i. In the figure,
Va  Vb  Vd  Vc
Fm v0 x
i.e. Ldi  Bldx
Integrating, we get Li  Blx
Magnetic force on the rod at this instant is
b c
B2  2
Fm  iB  x … (i)
L

Since, this force is in opposite direction of v , so from Newton’s second law we can write,
 d2 x  B2l2
m 2    x
 dt  L
Comparing this with equation of SHM, i.e.
d2 x
 2 x  0  x  A sin t  v  A cos t … ( ii)
dt 2
Bl
We have,  
mL
2 mL 82
So T  2  2  4s
 Bl  2
v 4
At t = 0, v  v 0  v 0  A  A  0  m
 
(Matching Type)
(Matching type - Single Correct Option)
This section contains SIX questions of matching type. The section contains TWO tables (each having 3
columns and 4 rows). Based on each table, there are THREE questions. Each question has FOUR
options (A), (B), (C), and (D). ONLY ONE of these four options is correct.
Answer 8, 9 and 10 by appropriately matching the information given in the three columns
of the following table.
Two moles of an ideal mono-atomic gas is V

taken through a cyclic process ABCA as C
shown in the V-T diagram. In the process 8V0
BC, TV2 = constant. Answer the questions
by referring to the data in the table.
(Take n  2   0.7 )
4V0 B
V0
A
T0 = 300K 4T0 = 1200K T
Column –1 shows the processes. Column –2 shows the work done in that process and Column
–3 shows the energy supplied in that process.
Column – 1 Column – 2 Column – 3
(I) AB (i) 1800 R (P) –1800 R
(II) BC (ii) –1260 R (Q) – 3060 R
(III) CA (iii) 900 R (R) 4500 R
(IV) BCAB (iv) 1440 R (S) 1440 R
8. Pick a combination in which work done is maximum
(A) (I) (i) (R)
(B) (II) (i) (P)
(C) (III) (iv) (S)
(D) (III) (ii) (R)
Ans. A
9. Pick a combination in which thermal energy supplied is maximum
(A) (II) (iii) (P)
(B) (IV) (iii) (S)
(C) (I) (i) (R)
(D) (I) (ii) (Q)
Ans. C
10. Pick a correct combination
(A) (I) (ii) (P)
(B) (I) (ii) (Q)
(C) (IV) (iv) (S)
(D) (II) (i) (Q)
Ans. C
Sol.8-10. The equation of the process BC is

TV 2  cons tan t
PV 3  cons tan t
Molar heat capacity of the gas in the process BC is
R
 C  CV 
1 x
3R R
  R
2 2
The work done by the gas during the process BC is
nRT 2R  900 
 WBC    900R
1 x 1 3
5R
Q AB  nCpT  2  1200  300   4500R
2
QBC  nCT  2  R 300  1200   1800R
 V 
QCA  WCA  nRT0 ln  0   2R300  3n2   1800R  0.7  1260R
 8V0 
 Wcycle  Qcycle  Q AB  QBC  QCA  4500R  1800R  1260R = 1440 R
Wcycle 1440R
 Efficiency,    100   100  32%
Qsup plied 4500R
Answer 11, 12 and 13 by appropriately matching the information given in the three
columns of the following table.
R2 i2
Vb R1
C qi
ib i1 K
qi is the initial charge on the capacitor. The key K is closed at t = 0

Battery Resistance Capacitance & Initial
charge
R1 = R2 = 5  C = 5 F
(I) Vb = 0 V (i) (P)
R = 10  qi = 0
R1 = 5 
(II) Vb = 30 V (ii) (Q) C = 20 F
R2 = 10 
qi = 0
R = 10 
R1 = 10 
C = 5 F
(III) Vb = –30 V (iii) R2 = 5  (R)
qi = 100 C
R = 10 
C = 20 F
(IV) Vb = 60 V (iv) R1 = R2 = R = 10  (S)
qi = 100 C
11. In which of the following cases, will the current i1 = 5/3 A, initially?
(A) (I) (i) (P)
(B) (II) (iv) (R)
(C) (II) (iv) (P)
(D) (I) (iii) (Q)
Ans. B
12. In which of the following cases will the net charge flowing through the capacitor be equal to 300
C?
(A) (II) (i) (S)
(B) (I) (ii) (R)
(C) (IV) (i) (S)
(D) (III) (iii) (P)
Ans. C
13. In which case will the current through R decay exponentially to zero with a time constant of 0.2
ms?
(A) (IV) (ii) (Q)
(B) (I) (iii) (S)
(C) (II) (i) (R)
(D) (I) (iii) (Q)
Ans. B
Sol.11-13. Vb  ibR  i1R1  0

i2R2  q / C  i1R1  0
dq
With i2 
dt
Substituting the given values, we get the result.
SECTION – C
(Single digit integer type)
This section contains FIVE questions. The answer to each question is a single Digit integer ranging from
0 to 9, both inclusive.
14. Inner surface of a cylindrical shell of length  and of material of T1 T2

thermal conductivity k is kept at constant temperature T1 and outer
surface of the cylinder is kept at constant temperature T2 such that
 T1  T2 as shown in figure. Heat flows from inner surface to outer
surface radially outward. Inner and outer radii of the shell are R and
2R respectively. Due to lack of space this cylinder has to be
 R
2R
R

replaced by a smaller cylinder of length , inner and outer radii
2 4
and R respectively and thermal conductivity of material nk. If rate
of radial outward heat flow remains same for same temperatures of
inner and outer surface i.e. T1 and T2, then find the value of n.
Ans. 4
Sol. Since rate of heat flow remains same in both the cases, so
2R R
dx dx
R k2 x   R  nk  4k  n = 4

4
nk  2  x  2
15. If the reading of the ideal ammeter connected 10 V 4V 8V 6V

 13 
in the given circuit is n   ampere, find the
 20 
value of n. Assume that the cells have 10  8 A
4 2
negligible internal resistance.
Ans. 3
8 2 2 6 8V 6V
Sol. I = I1 + I2 + I3 + I4 =   8V 10 V 4V
10 8 4 2 O
32  10  20  120 78
 Amp
40 40 10  I1 8  I2 4  I3 2  I4 A
I
O O O
O
16. To disperse all the mass of the Earth to infinity against its own gravitational field would require
2.4  1032J of energy. Mass of the earth is 6  1024 kg and radius of earth is 6400 km. Since earth
is mostly iron, therefore, its specific heat capacity is about 500J kg1 K1. Assuming that the earth
was formed by very cold objects falling from a great distance away, if its maximum possible
temperature soon after its formation is   104 K. Find the value of 
Ans. 8
Sol. 2.4  1032  6  1024  500  T

.4  108 4  105
 T   8  104 K
500 5
17. A conducting sphere of radius a is in side a hollow

conducting sphere of radii 2a and 3a as shown in the 3a
figure. The inner sphere is earthed. The capacitance of
system of sphere and hollow sphere is 5k0a. Find the 2a
value of k.
a A
Ans. 4
Sol. C1  120 a C1
4 0  b  a 
C2   8 0 a
ba
A B
C eq  C1  C2  200 a
C2
18. A current I = 20 ampere flows through a wire shaped in the form of an infinite parabola of latus

rectum 4a (a = 1 mm). If the magnetic field at the focus of the parabola is   10 tesla, where
 and  are the positive integer, less than 9. Find the value of    .
Ans. 6
Sol. The magnetic field at the focus P of the parabola is d

given by the Biot-Savart law: 

 0 Id   r
B , rd
4  r 3
d r
 
Where r and d l0 are as shown in figure. The
 P
direction of B is perpendicular to the plane of the
parabola and out of it. We note that
 
d  r r d sin  r d d
3
  2  .
r r3 r r
2
Therefore, B   0I / 4    d / r  . The equation of the parabola is r 1  cos    2a, so that
0
0I 2 1  cos   0I 4    107  20

B d     2  103 tesla
4 0 2a 4a 4  103
SECTION – A
19. Which of the following statement(s) is/are incorrect?
(A) Major part of energy needed for the heterolysis of C – X bond in SN1 reaction mechanism
-
is obtained by the solvation of X by polar protic solvent.
(B) Greater solvation of attacking nucleophile and poor solvation of transition state promotes
the reaction by SN2 mechanism.
(C) Increase in the number of phenyl ring at C of C – X causes a shift in mechanism from SN1
to SN2.
(D) Allyl and benzyl halides shows both SN1 and SN2 reaction.
Ans. B, C
20. Select the correct statements:
(A) NH2 – NH2 does not give Lassaigne’s test for detection of nitrogen.
(B) HCOOH gives (+ve) HgCl2 test.
(C) -D-glucopyranosyl--D-fructofuranose shows muta rotation.
O O
|| ||
(D) NH2  C NH  C NH2 gives Biuret test.
Ans. A, B, D

Sol. HgCl2  HCOOH   Hg  CO2  2HCl
Grey deposit 
21. CH3
Na O
Liq.NH   A  
 Zn  Product
3
3
Which of the following product can be obtained as major product(s) in above reaction?
(A) O O
H C CH2 C H
(B) O O
H3C C CH2 C H
(C) CHO
H3C HC
CHO
(D) O O
H3C C CH2 C CH3
Ans. A, B
Sol. CH3 CH3

O O
Na O3
   H C
Zn  3
C CH2 C H
Liq.NH3
O O
H C CH2 C H
22. The major product A and B in the following reaction sequence are:
O
 i NaBH
Dimer    ii TsOH  
4
  A  B
(A) O
(B) O
(C) O
(D)
C
Ans. B, D
Sol. O
O


 4  2 cycloaddition 
O O
NaBH4
OH
H OH
C H
TsOH
CH3 
O O
+
O
O
23. Which of the followings will give cyclic product upon heating?
(A) COOH
H3C CH2 CH2 CH2 HC
OH
(B) OH
H3C CH CH2 CH2 CH2 COOH
(C) OH
H3C CH2 CH CH2 CH2 COOH
(D) OH
H3C CH2 CH2 HC CH2 COOH
Ans. A, B, C
Sol. A will form lactide

O
C O
H9 C4 HC CH C 4H 9
O C
O
B, C form lactone
H3C O O H 5C 2 O O
24. Which of the following are correct statements?
(A) In carboxylate, nucleophile prefer to attack on acyl carbon while in sulfonates nucleophile
prefer to attack on alkyl carbon.
(B) Carboxylate anion is stronger base than sulfonate anion.
(C) Sulfonate anion is a better leaving group than carboxylate anion.
(D) Carboxylate anion is a better leaving group than sulfonate anion.
Ans. A, B, C
Sol. O O

Nu
R C OR   R C Nu  R  O
O O
Nu 
R S OR 
 R S O  R  Nu
O O
Sulfonoic acid is stronger acid than carboxylic acid.
(A) Sucrose has a pyranose and a furanose ring hold together by glycosidic linkage.
(B) Maltose has one glycosidic linkage and free hemiaccetal form
(C) Glucose, fructose and galactose forms same osazone
(D) 

Go for reaction,   D  Glucose 
   D  Glucose, is positive .
Ans. A, B


  D  Glucose 
   D  Glucose
Sol.
36% 64%
64% 16
K eq    1.77
36% 9
Go  2.303RT logk eq   ve
(Matching Type)
Answer Q. 26, Q. 27 and Q. 28 by appropriately matching the information given in the three
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3

(I) (i) NH2 (P) Give ppt. when
 3i CH  CH CH  Cl/Anhyd. AlCl treated with Br2/H2O

2 2
 ii O2 /h
3

 iii H
(II) (ii) O (Q) In presence of strong

i  BuLi base self

O C H
|| disproportionation
 ii  H C H/H
 iii PCC reaction takes place
(III) (iii) OH (R) Form foul smelling

i  BuLi compound with

O
|| CHCl3/NaOH
 ii  H C H/H
 iii PCl5
 iv  NH3
(IV) (iv) H2 C NH2 (S) Form acetyl

 i  CH3Cl/AlCl3 derivative with
  ii  Cl2 , h 
 iii  NaNH2 O
||
R  C Cl / Pyridine
26. Which of the following combination is CORRECT for I ?
(A) (I) (ii) (R)
(B) (I) (iii) (P)
(C) (I) (ii) (P)
(D) (I) (iii) (Q)
Ans. B
27. Which of the following combination is CORRECT?
(A) (II) (ii) (Q)
(B) (II) (ii) (R)
(C) (III) (ii) (R)
(D) (IV) (i) (Q)
Ans. A
28. Which of the following combination is CORRECT for IV ?
(A) (IV) (i) (P)
(B) (IV) (iv) (R)
(C) (IV) (i) (R)
(D) (IV) (i) (Q)
Ans. B

(I) Novolac (i) OH (P) Cross linked
 HCHO
(II) Bakelite (ii) O (Q) Linear chain

H2 C CH CH2
O 
OH OH OH
(III) Dacron (iii) COOH (R) Branched

chain
H2C CH2

OH OH
COOH
(IV) Glyptal (iv) NH2 (S) Fibre
 Formaldehyde
29. Which of the following combination is CORRECT for Glyptal?
(A) (IV) (ii) (P)
(B) (IV) (ii) (Q)
(C) (IV) (iv) (P)
(D) (IV) (i) (P)
Ans. A
30. Which of the following combination is CORRECT for Bakelite?
(A) (II) (i) (Q)
(B) (II) (i) (P)
(C) (II) (iv) (R)
(D) (II) (iv) (P)
Ans. B
(A) (IV) (iii) (P)
(B) (I) (iv) (P)
(C) (III) (iii) (S)
(D) (II) (iii) (S)
Ans. C
SECTION – C
Single Integer Answer Type
This section contains 5 questions. Each question, when worked out will result in one integer from 0 to 9
(both inclusive).
32.
KOH

EtOH
Br 
A B C
1.99 gram of A on above reaction produces 1.062 gram mixture of B and C ratio of 2 : 1. if
percentage of B formed will be x % then find the value of x/10.
Ans. 6
118  1.99
Sol. The theoretical yield will be   1.18 gram
199
1.062
Hence percentage yield will be   100%  90%
1.18
2
Hence, B formed will be  90%   60%
3
x = 6.
33.
NH2
NaNO2
HCl,   A
 B
COOH
What is the double bond equivalent of B.
Ans. 6
Sol.
NH2
COOH
34. How many of given below compounds will form red colour with HNO2 and followed by addition of
NaOH?
(CH3)2CHNO2, CH3CH2-NO2, (CH3)3NO2,
H
C NO 2
NO 2 ,
,
H3C HC NO 2
Ans. 1
Sol. HNO2
CH3  CH2  NO 2  NaOH
 CH3  C  NO 2   CH3  C  NO2
+
N OH N ONa
Nitrolic acid Red colour
35. Find the number of nucleophile whose nucleophilicity is greater than pyridine in SN2 reaction
RS  , ArS  ,I ,CN ,OH ,F ,NO3
Ans. 5
Sol. RS , ArS ,I ,CN ,OH
36. i Ph P CHCOOEt

Ph  CHO  3
ii LiAlH ,Et O 78o C
 A 
4 2
 i TsOH
ii A  B 

O
How many oxygen atoms are there in B.
Ans. 2
Sol. O
Ph  P CHCOOEt C
Ph  CHO 
3
 Ph LiAlH4
OEt Ph OH
A
O
 i TsOH
  ii  A  Ph O
O
B
SECTION – A

tanb     
37. If obtuse angle bisectors of the lines tan2 bx + 4y + 7 = 0 and x  y2 0;  b    ,   is
4   2 2 
 tanb 
 x  y  2
tan2 bx  4y  7 4
   , then b can lie in the interval
tan4 b  16 2
tan b
1
16
   
(A)   4 ,  12 
 
  
(B)  4, 0
 
   
(C)   12 ,  18 
 
  
(D)  12 , 4 
 
Ans. A, B, C
Sol. a1a2 + b1b2 < 0

 tan2 b + tan b < 0

 b0
4
38. The global minimum value of

|cot x – 1| + |cot x – 2| + |cot x – 31| + |cot x – 32| + |cot x – 24| + |cot x – 5| + |cot x – 6|
+ |cot x – 17| + |cot x – 8| + |cot x – 9| + |cot x – 10| + |cot x – 11| + |cot x – 12|

occurs at x  sec 1   , then INCORRECT statements is/are (where [.] denotes the greatest

integer function)
(A)     31
(B) [ + ] = 18

(C)    2
 
 2 
(D)    11
  
Ans. A, B, C, D
Sol. Minimum sum occurs at cot x = 10

 101 
 x = sec 1 
 10 
 
 4x 
39. If f  x   sin1   , then
 4  x2 
(A) f  
8  2    2 tan1  2 1 
2
(B) f  12  3   3
 3  1  3 
(C) f     2 tan  
 8 2  8 2

(D) f       2 tan1  
 2
Ans. A, B, C, D
 1  x 
   2 tan   ; x  2
  2
 4x   x
Sol. sin1  2 
  2 tan1   ; 2  x  2
 4  x   2
 x
   2 tan1   ; x2
  2
40. Minimum value of 2x 2  2x  1  2x 2  10x  13 is  , then
(A)  is an even number
(B) sum of digits of  is 2
(C) number of prime factors of  is 2
(D) number of prime factors is 3
Ans. A, B, C
Sol.    12     2  2 2     2 2     2  5 2
Line is y = x + 2 and P(,  + 2) is any point on this line and A  (2, 5) and B(–1, 2)
41. Let ABC be a triangle and D be the mid-point of side BC. Suppose DAB = BCA and DAC =
15º, then
(A) ADC is obtuse
(B) ADC is acute
(C) if O is the circumcentre of ADC, then AOD is equilateral
(D) if O is the circumcentre of ADC, then triangle AOD is isosceles
Ans. A, C
AD BD CD AD
Sol.  , 
sinB sin  sin 15º  sin 
Finally, we get ADC is obtuse
42. A hexagon inscribed in a circle has three consecutive sides of length 3 and three consecutive
sides of length 5, and then the radius of the circle is
7
(A)
3
5
(B)
2
(C) 2 3
(D) 4
Ans. A
Sol. Let the hexagon be ABCDEF with AB = BC = CD = 3 and DE = EF = FA = 5

So, AOB = BOC = COD =  and DOE = EOF = FOA = 
So,  +  = 120º
 
Now, 3  2r sin   and 5  2r sin  
2  2
 120º     9  3 7
5  2r sin   ; 5  r  3 1  2    ; r 
 2    4r  2r  3
20 20

43. If S    tan1   , then S is equal to
1  1 
(A) 100 
(B) 300 
(C) 400 
(D) 225 
Ans. A
20 20
   
Sol. S    tan1   =  20     190  100
1  1   4 2
(Matching Type)
Column-1: contains the curve; Column-2: number of irrational points on the curve; Column-3: number of
integral points on the curve (irrational points means both coordinates are irrational and integral points
means both coordinates are integer)
Column-1 Column-2 Column-3

x2 y2
(I)  1 (i) infinite (P) 2
9 4
x2
(II)  y2  1 (ii) 800 (Q) 4
35
(III) x2 – y2 = (200)2 (iii) 200 (R) 30
(IV) x4 – y4 = 2401 (iv) 16 (S) 100
(A) (IV) (i) (P)
(B) (IV) (i) (R)
(C) (III) (i) (Q)
(D) (IV) (ii) (S)
Ans. A
(A) (III) (i) (Q)
(B) (III) (ii) (R)
(C) (III) (i) (R)
(D) (I) (i) (P)
Ans. C
46. Which of the following combination is INCORRECT?
(A) (IV) (i) (P)
(B) (III) (i) (Q)
(C) (II) (i) (P)
(D) (IV) (ii) (S)
Ans. D
x2
Sol. (II) For
35
 y2  1 ,  35 cos , sin  
 35 k 35 
Let tan   k 35   , 2 
 
 1  35k 1  35k 
2
1  35k 2 1
Let  k  , k 2  k 2 
35 35
1
 k   k k   k   infinite possible ways
35
(III) For x2 – y2 = (200)2, (x – y)(x + y) = 24  54
Let (x > 0, y > 0) assign one 2 to each (x + y) and (x – y)
35 1
Now, number of ways = 7
2
So, total integral points = 30
(IV) Number of integral points on x4 – y4 = 2401 is 2
Answer Q.47, Q.48 and Q.49 by appropriately matching the information given in the three columns
of the following table.
Column-1: contains conics; Column-2: number of common tangents; Column-3: number of common
normals
Column-1 Column-2 Column-3

(I) 2y2 = 2x – 1 and 2x2 = 2y – 1 (i) 0 (P) 0
2 4  3
(II)  y  1   x   and
3 4 
2 (ii) 1 (Q) 1
 3
 x   2
 4   y  1
 1
9 3
2 2
(III) x = y – 2 and y + x – 2x + 3 = 0 (iii) 2 (R) 2
2 2
(IV) y = –4x and x = –4y (iv) 3 (S) 3
47. Which of the following options is the only CORRECT combination?
(A) (I) (iv) (Q)
(B) (I) (iv) (S)
(C) (II) (i) (S)
(D) (II) (ii) (S)
Ans. A
48. Which of the following options is the only CORRECT combination?
(A) (IV) (i) (Q)
(B) (IV) (i) (P)
(C) (IV) (ii) (Q)
(D) (I) (iv) (P)
Ans. C
49. Which of the following options is the only INCORRECT combination?
(A) (III) (iii) (Q)
(B) (II) (i) (S)
(C) (II) (iii) (S)
(D) (IV) (ii) (Q)
Ans. B
Sol. (I) 2y2 = 2x – 1 and 2x2 = 2y – 1

 1 1
Equation of tangents are y  m  x   
 2  4m
2
1 m
and y   mx  respectively
2 4
m 1 1 m2
So,     ; m3 – 2m2 – 2m + 1 = 0
2 4m 2 4
This equation has 3 real and distinct roots i.e., 3 common tangents
For common normals they are symmetric about y = x
So, only one common normal
4 x2 y2
(II) After shifting at origin, we get y 2  x and  1
3 9 3
Equation of normals are y  mx 

2
m
1 3
m and y  mx 

m a2  b2 
3 3 2 2 2
a b m
2 1 3 6m
So, m m  ; m = 0, 1. Hence, 3 common normals
3 3 9  3m2
m2
(III) y = x2 and y = –(x – 1)2 equation of tangents are y = mx –
4
m2
and y  m  x  1  respectively
4
So, we get m = 0, 2; 2 common tangents
1 1 1 1
Common normals: equation are y  mx   and y  mx  m  
2 4m2 4m2 2
3 2
So, we get 2m + 2m + 1 = 0 only one real root is 1 common normals
(IV) y2 = –4x and x2 = –4y

Number of common tangents will be same
2 2
For y = 4x and x = 4y only one common tangents
3 1
Common normals: 2m + m = 2  2
m
f(m) = m5 + 2m3 + 2m2 + 1 only one root negative
So, only one common normals
SECTION – C
(One Integer Value Correct Type)
(both inclusive).
3x  2
50. If a chord AB of the curve y  is a normal to the curve at a point A, subtending an angle 
x2
sin    PAB 
at the point P(2, 3). Then the value of is equal to _____
sin    PAB 
Ans. 3
Sol. Shift the curve so that centre is origin, xy = 4  c

1 1 1 1  t4 A  ct1, 
 t 2  3 ; m  OA   2 , m  OB   2  t16 ; tan   2 1  t1 
t1 t1 t2 t1
1 0(0, 0)
t12  B
t12 t14  1
Also, tan  OAB     c
1 1 2t12  ct 2 , 
 t 2 
tan 
  2
tan  OAB 
sin    A 
So, 3
sin    A 
51. Assuming that no three circles passing through same points and every two circles intersects in
two distinct points. If the number of regions that points are created by 7 mutually non over-lapping
circles in a plane is 11k, then k is _____
Ans. 4
Sol. Tn = Tn – 1 + 2(n – 1): n  2

Tn = n2 – n + 2
T7 = 72 – 7 + 2 = 44
2 2
52. The combined equation of the principal axes of the hyperbola 2x + 12xy – 7y – 16x + 2y – 5 = 0
is ax2 + 2hxy + by2 – x + 7y + c = 0, then |a + b – 2h + c| is equal to _____
Ans. 6
Sol. c  (1, 1); The axes are the bisectors of the angle between the asymptotes
 x  12   y  12 2   7 
So, 
 x  1 y  1 6
2 2
2x – 3xy – 2y – x + 7y – 3 = 0
x2 y2
53. From the point (1, 1) normals are drawn to the ellipse   1 , then locus of conormal points
9 4
2 2
is 1xy + 2x + 3y + 4x + 5y + 6 = 0, then 1 + 2 + 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 is equal to _____
Ans. 0
x  x1 y  y1 Q(x2, y2) P(x1, y1)

Sol. Equation of normal at P(x1, y1); 
x1 y1
2
a b2
2 2 2 2 A(h, k)
 (a – b )x1y1 + b yx1 – a xy1 = 0
Point (h, k) lies on it
So; (a2 – b2)x1y1 + b2kx1 – a2hy1 = 0
h(x3, y3) s(x4, y4)
Similarly, for points Q, R and S are
2 2 2 2
(a – b )x2y2 + b kx2 – a hy2 = 0
(a2 – b2)x3y3 + b2kx3 – a2hy3 = 0 and (a2 – b2)x4y4 + b2kx4 – a2hy4 = 0
Thus, P, Q, R, S lie on the curve (a2 – b2)xy + b2kx – a2hy = 0 i.e., 5xy + 4x – 9y = 0
54. Three circles C1, C2 and C3 with radii 2, r, 8 respectively are given. They are placed such that C2
lies to the right of C1 and touches it externally, C3 lies to the right of C2 and touches it externally.
Further, there exist two straight lines each of which is a direct common tangent simultaneously to
all three circles, then r is _____
Ans. 4
Sol. r  28
FIITJEE
PART TEST – II
JEE (Advanced)-2018-19
PAPER – 2
TEST DATE: 18-11-2018

 Each Part is further divided into Three Sections: Section-A, Section-C & Section-D.
Section-A (01 – 03, 24 – 26, 47 – 49) contains 9 multiple choice questions which have only one
correct answer. Each question carries +3 marks for correct answer and –1 mark for wrong
answer.
Section-A (04 – 08, 27 – 31, 50 – 54) contains 15 multiple choice questions which have one or
more than one correct answer. Each question carries +4 marks for correct answer and –2 mark
for wrong answer.
Section-A (09 – 10, 32 – 33, 55 – 56) contains 3 paragraphs. Based upon paragraph, 2 multiple
choice questions have to be answered. Each question has only one correct answer and carries +3
marks for correct answer. There is no negative marking.
Section-C (11 – 20, 34 – 43, 57 – 66) contains 30 Numerical based questions with answer as
negative marking.
Section-D (21 – 23, 44 – 46, 67 – 69) contains 9 Numerical answer type questions with answer
XXXXX.XX and each question carries +4 marks for correct answer and –1 mark for wrong answer.
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
Single Correct Choice Type
This section contains 3 multiple choice questions. Each question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D)
out of which ONLY ONE is correct.

1. A conducting disc of conductivity  has radius a and thickness . A uniform magnetic field B is
applied in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the disc. If the magnetic field changes with
time at the rate of dB/dt, then the power dissipated in the disc due to the induced current.
2
a4  dB 
(A)  
8  dt 
2
a4  dB 
(B)  
12  dt 
2
a4  dB 
(C)  
4  dt 
2
a4  dB 
(D)  
6  dt 
Ans. A
Sol. Consider two circles of radii r and r + dr concentric with the disc
(0 < r < a) (figure). The induced e.m.f. in the circular path of 
radius r is a
d dB O r

dt

r 2B  r 2 
dt
. dr B
The resistance of the circular path between radii r and r + dr is
1 2r
R ,
 dr B
The length of the path being 2r and the cross sectional area of
current flow being dr. The power dissipated inside this path is
2
 2   dB  3
dP     r dr.
R 2  dt 
The total dissipated power P is
2 a 2
  dB  3 a 4  dB 
P    r dr    .
2  dt  0
8  dt 
2. In the circuit shown in figure, the switch ‘S’ is closed L1 R1

at t = 0. The value of current in the resistor R3, when it
becomes steady (as compared to the steady current R2
R3
E
before closing the switch S)
L2
(A) Increases
(B) Decreases
(C) Remains constant
(D) Becomes zero
Ans. B
E
Sol. Initial current in R3, ii 
R1  R3
E R2 R2E
Final current if   =
R 2R 3 R2  R3 R1(R2  R3 )  R2R3
R1 
R 2  R3
E
If =
R1R 3
 R1  R3
R2
As if < ii, so current in the resistor R3 will decrease.
3. A straight segment OP of length L of a circuit carrying current I ampere is placed along x-axis.
Two infinitely long straight wires A and B each extending from z =  to + are fixed at y = 
meter to y = + meter respectively. Wires A and B, each carry current I ampere along positive z-
axis. Given that O is origin of the coordinate system. The magnitude of force on segment OP is
0 2  L2 
(A) I n 1  2 
   
 
0 2  L2 
(B) I n  1  2 
2   
0 2   2 
(C) I n 1  2 
  L 
0 2  2 
(D) I n  1  2 
2  L 
Ans. B
Sol. Net B at distance x from O along x-axis A Y

 I
= 0 2cos  X
2 r 
r O
 I
 F   dF   I 0 2cos dx x 
2 r O
 P
  L2 
 0 I2 n  1  2  
2   
 
B

4. Logarithms of reading of pressure and volume for an log P(kPa)

ideal gas were plotted in the graph. By measuring
the gradient it can be shown that 5.38
5.10
3.10 3.30 logV (dm3)
(A) The gas may be Mono-atomic
(B) The gas may be Diatomic
(C) The process is an adiabatic change
(D) The process is an isothermal change.
Ans. B, C
Sol. log P = m log V + C …(i)

Where C is constant and m is slope
 5.38  5.10 
m   1.4
 3.10  3.30 
1.4
So, from (i) PV = K (constant)
5. In a RLC series circuit shown in the figure, the V2

readings of voltmeters V1 and V2 are 100 V and 120 C
R L
V respectively. The source voltage (V) of
alternating source is 130 V. Mark the correct
option(s).
V1
V
~
(A) Voltage across resistor, inductor and capacitor are 50 V, 86.6 V and 186.6 V respectively.
(B) Voltage across resistor, inductor and capacitor are 50 V, 86.6, 206.6V respectively.
5
(C) Circuit is capacitive and power factor is .
13
5
(D) Circuit is inducting and power factor is .
13
Ans. B, C
Sol. Let voltage across resistor, inductor and capacitor be VR , VL and VC . Also since V2  V1 so
VC  VL .
2
 VR2  VL2  V12  1002 and VC  VL  120 and VR2   VC  VL   130 2
Solving VR  50V, VL  86.6 V, VC  206.6 V
VR 50 5
Power factor = cos    
VZ 130 13
6. An electrical circuit is shown in the R V

figure. It has two conducting spheres A
and B of radii 3a and 6a respectively.
When the inductor of inductance L is in
its steady state the switch is shifted
from position-1 to position-2. Now 1
choose the correct option(s)
3a
6a
L 2
A B
V
(A) Maximum charge on the sphere A is 80 aL .
R
V
(B) Maximum charge on the sphere B is 40 aL .
R
(C) The circuit contains only magnetic energy at time t  83 0 aL .
(D) The circuit contains only electrical energy at time t  23 0 aL .
Ans. A, C, D
V 3C I L 6C
Sol. I0  , 3C  4 0 a  3  C  40 a
R
dI –q q –q q
0
dt
q q dI
 L 0
3C 6C dt
d2 q q d2 q q
 L 2
  0  2
 0
dt 2C dt 2LC
1
 q  q0 sin t, I  q0  cos t,  
2LC
I0
At t  0, I  I0  q0   I0 2LC

V
q0  80 aL
R
2
T  2 80 aL

T
 23 0 aL
4
7. Three small metallic charged balls (radius tends to v

zero) have equal charges q and masses m, 4m and m
as shown in the figure. The balls are connected by light
string (Non-conducting) of length  each, and placed
on horizontal frictionless, non-conducting table. Initially  
m, q 4m, q m, q
balls are at rest and form a straight line. A sharp
horizontal impulse gives the central ball a speed v
directed perpendicular to strings connecting the balls.
Choose correct option(s):
(A) The minimum distance during subsequent motion between the balls of mass m is
6q2 
3q  16m 0 v 2 
2
(B) The minimum distance during subsequent motion between the balls of mass m is
3q2 
3q2  16m 0 v 2 
(C) The maximum difference in electrostatic potential energy of the system during
2mv 2
subsequent motion is
3
(D) The maximum difference in electrostatic potential energy of the system during
4mv 2
subsequent motion is
3
Ans. A, C
4mv 2v
Sol. v CM  
6m 3
In centre of mass frame
Gain in P.E. = Loss in KE
q2  1 1  2 4mv 2
  2mv 
40  D 2  3
6q2 
 D
3q2  16m0 v 2 
8. The figure shows the variation of electrostatic potential V in volt with the distance of position of
point along x-axis from origin due to continuous volume charge distribution. In the region x = – 1m
to x = + 1m, the graph is parabolic (V = 15 – 5x2) and rest portion of graph is straight line. Choose
–12 –1 –2 2

the correct option(s) (0  permittivity of free space = 8.85 × 10 N m C ). The direction of E
along positive x-axis is considered as positive.
V (in volt)
2
15 V = 15 – 5x
B
A 10
5
(in metre)
–3 –2 –1 0 +1 +2 +3 X
(A) This graph of potential may be due to a thick sheet of infinite dimension (– 1m  x  1, –
 < y <  and –  < z < ) with constant volume charge density 1.77 × 10–10 C/m3.
(B) This graph of potential may be due to a thick sheet of infinite dimension (– 1m  x  1, –
 < y <  and –  < z < ) with constant volume charge density 0.885 × 10–10 C/m3.
(C) E (electric field)
X
O
(D) E (electric field)
X
O
Ans. A, C

Sol. dV  Edx  xdx
20
V x
  2
 dv  20  xdx  V  V0 
40
x , so
V0 0
V0  15 volt

 5    200  20  8.85  10 12  1.77  10 10 C / m3
40
E y xS
E  2S 
0
10 x
E
20
x X
O x = 1m
x
–10
Paragraph type (One Option Correct)

This section contains 1 paragraph each describing theory, experiment, data etc. Two questions relate to
the paragraph. Each question of a paragraph has Only One correct answer among the four choices (A),
(B), (C) and (D).
Paragraph for Questions 9 & 10
The melting point of wax is measured by using a thermometer
which is not exact, and it indicates a temperature of 50°C as shown
Thermometer 50°C
in figure-I.
Just melted
Wax-Box
Figure-I
A Wheatstone bridge is used to measure this melting point exactly.

The deviation from 50°C is being measured by observing the 50
variation of the resistance of a coil embedded in wax. 50
The Wheatstone bridge is setup so that the resistance of G

each arm is 50 exactly at 50°C, and there is no current in the 50
galvanometer as shown in figure-II. The resistance of the Ig = 0
galvanometer is 50. 50
50
2.5V
Figure-II
One arm of the bridge containing the coil of resistance 50 is now
50 Wax-Box
immersed in a wax-box. The wax is just melted as shown in the figure-
III. It is now observed that the current through the galvanometer is 0.1
A.
G
–3 50
Given, temperature coefficient of resistance is 10 per °C.
Resistances other than inside wax-box are assumed to be constant Ig  0
50
and are exactly 50 while the resistance of wax box is very close to 50
50.
2.5V
Figure-III
9. The variation in the resistance inside the wax-box from its initial value of 50 is
(A) 1 104 
(B) 2  104 
(C) 4  10 4 
(D) 8  104 
Ans. D
10. Calculate the deviation in the melting point from 50°C.
(A) 0.004C
(B) 0.008C
(C) 0.016C
(D) 0.036C
Ans. C
Sol. 9-10.
When the four arms have equal resistances, the off-
balance galvanometer current for a small change R in the 50 Wax-Box
resistance of the third arm is
V R
IG  B 2 .
8R G
50
Here IG  107 A, R  50, and VB  2.5V. Hence
8  107  25  102 50
R   8  10 4  . 50
2.5
2.5V
If the corresponding change in temperature is T, we have
RT  R3 ,
–3
Where  = temperature coefficient of resistance = 10 /°C.
8  104
Therefore, T   1.6  10 2  0.016C .
50  103
SECTION – C
This section contains 10 questions. The answer to each question is a Single Digit Integer ranging from
11. An air-filled capacitor of capacitance 50 pF is charged to a voltage V and connected across

another uncharged capacitor of capacitance 100 pF, the final voltage across each capacitor is V1
volt. Now an identical air-filled capacitor of capacitance 50 pF is totally filled with a solid dielectric
of dielectric constant 2n & again charged to the same voltage V as before. It is now connected
across another uncharged capacitor of capacitance 100 pF, the final voltage across each
V 2
capacitor is V2 volt. If 1 is then find the value of n.
V2 5
Ans. 5
Sol. In the first case,

Charge = CV = (C + Ce)V1, …(i)
Where C = 50 pF, Ce = 100 pF
In the second case,
Charge = KCV = (KC + Ce)V2, …(ii)
Dividing (ii) by (i) we obtain
KC  Ce V2 KC  Ce 2.5KC  2.5Ce
K .   2.5 
C  Ce V1 C  Ce C  Ce
Ce
 1.5KC  K  2.5  Ce  1.5K  K  2.5   2 K  2.5 
C
 0.5 K = 5  K = 10  n = 5.
12. A long thin copper wire of the radius 2mm, carries a time-varying current I = t ampere (uniformly
distributed), then the induced electric field on its surface is equal to k X10–7 Vm–1. Find the value
of k. Take the induced field along the axis of the wire to be zero.
Ans. 1
Sol. Let the radius of the wire be R. Consider a rectangle abcd in

the wire with the side ab along the axis. The magnetic dr
a d
 Ir
induction at a distance r from the axis (r < R) is B  0 2 I=t
2R Es
ampere r
The flux through the elementary shaded area within abcd is
Bldr, where  = ab = cd. The flux  through abcd is
R c
 Ir  I b
   0 2 dr  0 .
0 2 R
4 R
R
The induced emf along the curve abcd is
d 0  dI  0 
    …(i)
dt 4  dt 4
The wire being thin, cd >> da. If Es is the induced electric field at the surface and E0 that along
the axis, then   Es  E0  . Since E0 = 0, we obtain from (i)
0
Es   107 Vm1 .
4
Clearly, Es is independent of the radius of the wire.
0 0
13. A conducting ring of radius R & mass 300 g, carrying current I 30 30
ampere as shown in the figure. A bar magnet with its north
pole up is placed along the symmetric axis below the
conducting ring at a distance of 2m from the centre of ring. At
0
the location of ring, the magnetic field makes an angle 30 2m
1
with vertical and its magnitude is Tesla. If ring remains at
3π N
rest in its position, find the product of current I in the ring and
radius R of ring in ampere-meter. g  10 m / s  2

Ans. 9

Sol. 
Fmag  mg  B sin 30   I   2 R   mg
mg 0.3  10  3  2
 IR     9 A-m
2 B sin 30 2
14. A neutral metal sphere is placed at a large distance from a point charge. The magnitude of
Coulomb electrostatic interaction force between the charge and sphere is F0 . If the distance
between them is doubled, the new magnitude of Coulomb electrostatic interaction force between
n
the charge and sphere is 2 F0 . Find the value of n. (Assuming that the radius of sphere is very
small as compared to the distance between them)
Ans. 5
Sol. Due to induction, the sphere behaves as dipole whose dipole moment is directly proportional to
inducing field generated by point charge. So
a
p  2 , a is a constant and r is the distance between them.
r
bqp baq baq baq 5
p q
F0  3  5  F  5
 5 5
 2 F0
r r  2r  2 r r
15. On a sunny day, the temperature and pressure of atmosphere varying with height z from sea
level as

 z   z 
T  T0 1   , and P  P0  1  
 z0   z0 
Where T0 and z0, are 25°C and 25 km. The temperature A
pressure and density of air at sea level is T0 = 25°C, P0 =
1 atm and 1.2 kg/m3 respectively. Assume that air follows
T z
ideal gas law in the given condition, i.e.,  cons tan t.
P
Find the value of . Sea level
5 2 2
1 atm = 10 N/m and g = 10 m/s (g is uniform)
Ans. 3
Sol. dp  gdz A
dp  gT P
  0 0
dz P0 T dz
PA
P z
dP g dz
   0 
P0
P P0 0 z 
1  
 z0 
z
P  0 gz0  z  (P+dp)A
 n   n 1  
 P0  P 0  z 0 
(Adz)g Sea level

 Z 
 P  P0  1   , where
 Z0 
 gz 1.2  10  25  10 3
 0 0  3
p0 105
16. In the circuit shown, all capacitors are identical. Initially,

the switch is open and capacitor-C1 is the only charged
capacitor. After the switch is closed, the equilibrium is
re-established and the charge on the capacitor – C1 is C1
a
Q. If initial charge on the capacitor – C1 was Q0  Q,
b C6
where a and b are positive integer, lying between 0 to 9.
C3
Find the value a – b.
C2 C4
C5
Ans. 3
Q Q 0  Q 8Q
Sol.   0  3Q  5Q0  5Q  0  Q0 
C 3C 5
5
Q0 – Q
+Q0 3C +Q 3C
–Q0 5 –Q 5
–Q0 + Q
Just before closing the switch Just after closing the switch

17. A point charge Q = 500 mC and mass B N
–6 I
m = 10 kg is moving in a uniform magnetic T


field B  1 tesla kˆ with speed v = 106 m/s and M
follows path as shown in figure-1. If a wire with T

shape same as the trajectory of charged
particle carrying current I = 2A is kept in same Figure-1 Figure-2
magnetic field, each point of the wire
experiences a tension T (in newton) in
magnitude. Find the value of T.
Ans. 4
mv T mvI
Sol. R1  R 2    T
qB BI Q
10 6  106  2
 T  4 newton
500  103
18. Four resistance R, 3R, R and 3R are connected

as shown in figure. The two real voltmeters are
identical and Ammeter is ideal. If the value of R is V 0.5 V
25N  , find the value of N. You decide
arrangement of the resistances so that the given
conditions are satisfied.
V A
3V 6 mA
Ans. 5
Sol. x  y  6  x  3.5 mA X R B 3R Y
x  1  y y  2.5mA A C
KVL:
V I=x–y
3.5R  500  2.5  3R  0
3R
 4R = 500R = 125  A C
0.5 Y D X
R v  3  500  R
10
V A C
A
E C
3V
19. Particle A with charge 2q and mass mA, and particle B with charge 4q and mass m B are
accelerated with potential difference of V & 4 V respectively. Both particles are deflected by a
uniform magnetic field into semicircular paths. The radius of trajectories of particle A and B are R
and 2R respectively. The direction of magnetic field is perpendicular to the velocity. Find value of
mB
.
mA
Ans. 2
1
Sol. qV  mv 2  mv  2qm V
2
mv 2qmV m V
R   R 
Bq Bq q
m A V mB 4V 1
R , & 2R  
2q 4q 2
m A 1 1 m A 1 1 mA 1
 .   .   
mB 2 2 mB 2 4 mB 2
20. Two point charges +Q and –Q are kept at points (a, 0) y

and (–a, 0). P(0, y0)
A dipole of dipole strength p and mass m is released + –
from point P(0, y0), where y0 >>> a; as shown in the
5Qp
figure. If the maximum speed of dipole is ,
0ma2
(–a, 0)A B(a, 0)
find the value of  X
–Q O +Q
Ans. 5
Sol. The force acting on the dipole is along negative y-axis.

1   1 2KQ
2 2 a
 
Ei  0, E f  mv 2  p.E  mv 2  p  î . 2  î  
Using COME, we have
1 Qp Qp
mv 2  v 
2 20 a 2
0ma2
SECTION – D
This section contains 3 questions. The answer to each question is a NUMERICAL VALUE. For each
question, enter the correct numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded‐off to the second
decimal place; e.g. xxxxx.xx).
21. Consider the circuit shown in the figure. E1, E2 are sources of emf R1 = 3 E1 = 10 V
and R1, R2 are fixed resistances. E1 = 10V, E2 = 20V while R1 =
3, R2 = 2. The inductance L = 5 mH.
Take n 2  0.7, n3  1.1, n10  2.3.
The switch S is closed for a long time. The energy stored (in joule)
in the inductor is R2=2 L = 5 mH
S
E2=20V
Ans. 00000.25
Sol. After the switch S, has been closed for a long time, the current R1 E1
through the inductor L can be found using Kirchoff’s Law:
2
1 E 
E2/R2 = I2. The stored energy is: L  2  . R2 L
2  R2 
After the switch S is opened, the current through the inductor
L is given by:
 
 
i  I1 1  eR t /L  I2 e R t /L
where R  R1  R 2 , E2 S
I1  E1 /  R1  R2 ,
I2  E2 / R2 .
22. Two solenoids, each of radius 2 cm are placed

coaxially with a gap of 1 cm between them. 2
Determine the magnetic field (in Gauss) at the 2 2 cm
centre of the gap if a current of 2 A flows through 1 1
z-axis
the two solenoids in series. Assume that each P
solenoid contains 40 turns per cm.
22
cos 1  0.907 , cos 2  0.242 ,   .
7
S1 1 cm S2
Ans. 00066.88
Sol. Let the two solenoids be S1 and S2, as shown in figure. The magnetic field at the centre-point p of
the gap due to the solenoid S1 is
 NI  NI
B1  0 [cos 1  cos    2 ]  0 cos 1  cos 2  ,
2L 2L
Where the angles 1 and 2 are as shown in figure. The field B1 is along the z-axis. By symmetry,
the field at p due to the solenoid S2 has the same magnitude and direction as B1. Thus the net
magnetic field at P is
 NI
B  2B1  0  cos 1  cos 2  .
L
N/L = 40 cm1  4  103 m1, 0  4  107 Henry / m, and I  2A.
Therefore, B  4  107  4  103  2   0.907  .242  = 66.88 Gauss.
23. A semi-circular conducting wire of radius 2m is rotated in a O



uniform magnetic field B  0.1 Tesla k̂ about point O with 
angular speed  = 10 rad/s as shown in the figure. The axis


of rotation is parallel to B. Find the potential difference (in M 53°
4 N

volt) between point M and point N.  tan53   .
 3
Ans. 00004.80
B 2 B22 B 2
Sol. e1 
2
, e2 
2
 VN  VM  e2  e1 
2
 
 2  12  2BR 2 cos   4.8 volt
O
 
1  2R sin    2  2Rcos  
2 2

M N M 1 O 2 N
1 2

M O
N
Second Method v N   2

1  
v  VN  VM  Rcos  2R
2
M
e  Bv  B  2R  Rcos  
 2BR 2 cos 
v M   1
3
 2  0.1 10  4   4.8 Volt
5
SECTION – A
Straight Objective Type
its answer, out of which Only One is correct.
24. In the following reaction sequence the correct structure for the major products X & Y are
NO2
K 2CO 3 Sn HCl
   X 
 Y
O
(A) O
X Y
NO2
Me N Et
H
(B) O
X Y OH
NO2 Me N Et
H
(C) HO Et HO Et
X Y
NO2 NH2
(D) HO Et HO Et
Y Y
NO2 NO2
Ans. B
Sol. O
NO2
 OH  C 2H 5
 
O
NO2
Sn  HCl
O
C
OH OH C2 H5

Me Et Me Et NH2
N N
H H
 O
||
25. Compound A, C5H10O5 gives a tetraacetate with CH3  C  O and oxidation of A with Br2 – H2O

 
 2
gives an acid, C5H10O6. Reduction of A with red P and HI gives iso-pentane, there are two
possible structures for compound A which can be distinguished by using
(A) HIO4
(B) Red P + HI
(C) Phenyl hydrazine
(D) Tollen’s reagent
Ans. C
Sol. H OH
CH2OH CHO
O OH
HO HO
OH
OH HO
(i) (ii)
(i) will form osazone derivatives whereas (ii) will not.
26. The major product formed in the following reaction is:

O
MeMgCl, CuCl
 
Cl
(A) O
(B)
O Me
(C)
O
CH3
(D) O
CH3
Ans. D
Sol. O O O
Cl
MeMgCl, CuCl
 
CH3 CH3
its answer, out of which MORE THAN ONE is/are correct.
OH OH
OH
i CHCl
3 ,NaOH

ii  H O
A 
2 2
27.
CH3 CH3
(A) A will give +ve test with Tollen’s reagent
(B) A is a weak organic monobasic acid
(C) A is a aldehyde
(D) A on reaction with conc. H2SO4 produces a neutral gas which is a very good reducing
agent.
Ans. A, B, D
Sol. OH O OH O
OH O
C CH O
H O CH
O H
OOH
 
CH3 CH3
CH3
CHCl3 / OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
 HCOOH
CH3
CH3
Hence A will be HCOOH.
HCOOH + conc. H2SO4  CO
CO is a neutral gas as well as very good reducing agent.
28. An organic compound contains C, H, S, N and Cl, for detection of chlorine, the sodium extract of
compound is first heated with a few drop of conc. HNO3, and than AgNO3 is added to get a white
ppt. of AgCl, why was HNO3 added before the addition of AgNO3.
(A) To prevent the formation of NO2.
(B) To create a common ion effect.
(C) To convert CN – and S-2 to volatile HCN and H2S, else they will interfere with the test
forming AgCN and Ag2S.
(D) To prevent the hydrolysis to NaCN and Na2S.
Ans. C
29. Br
MgEther  NaNH
 A 
 NH     B
2
3
Cl
CH3
(A) Both A and B are aromatic in nature.
(B) Product A can show nucleophilic addition reaction.
(C) If potential nucleophile is not present then A will form dimer.
(D) B is a mixture of two structural isomers.
Ans. A, B, C, D
Sol. Br MgBr
Mg

 

Cl Cl
CH3 CH3 CH3
NaNH2
CH3 NH3   
CH3
NH2 CH3 CH3
NH2
Dimer 
Sn HCl
30. CH3  CH2  NO 2  X    K  Organic compound  , then which of the following is/are
true for K?
(A) K (form solid oxamide) with diethyl oxalate.
(B) K (form liquid oxamide) with diethyl oxalate.
(C) K will not give Liberman nitroso test.
(D) K will form blue colour complex with Cu+2 salt.
Ans. A, C, D
SnHCl
Sol. CH3  CH2  NO2   CH3  CH2  NH2 K 
1o amine form solid oxamide
2o amine form liquid oxamide
Liberman Nitroso test is given by 2o amine
2
Cu2  4C2H5NH2   Cu  C 2H5NH2  4 
Blue 
31. In which case charge in transition state is more dispersed than starting material?
(A) CH3 X  NaNH2
(B) CH3 X  NH3
(C)  CH3 4 N X  OH
(D)  CH3 4 N X  RSH

Ans. A, C, D

(B), (C) and (D).
Hg2 ,H O/HNO2 BF4  


2
  A    B 
NH2  NH2 / OH
CH3 2 NH 1equivalent  Cl2 /AlCl3 ICl

F  
 E  D   C 
32. The compound (D) is
(A)
I NO 2
(B) Me
I
NO2
(C)
Me
I
NO2
(D)
NO 2
I
Ans. C
33. The compound F is
(A) Cl
N
Me
O 2N
NO 2 Cl
(B) H3C CH3

N
I
NO2
(C)
N
H3C CH3
NO2
(D) NO 2
N Cl
H3C CH2
Ans. B
Solution for the Q. No. 32 and 33.

O
O
Hg2 , H /H O

2
 NOBF
4

2
A  B 
NO 2
NH2  NH2 / OH
C
NO 2
ICl
H3C CH3
N Cl
Cl2 / AlCl3
CH3 2 NH
 
I I I
F 
NO2 NO2 NO2
E D
Single Integer Answer Type
This section contains 10 questions. Each question, when worked out will result in one integer from 0 to
9 (both inclusive).
34. 2.79 gm of nitrogenous compound on reaction with CS2 and HgCl2 forms a black ppt. of 0.09 mol.
If same amount of nitrogenous compound is reacted with HNO2. How many litres of gas at STP
would be formed.
Ans. 2
Sol. RNH2  CS 2  HgCl2 

 RNCS  HgS 
0.09 0.09
RNH2  HNO2 
 ROH  N2 
0.09 0.09
Volume in litres at STP = 0.09 × 22.4 = 2.016  2
O3 , CH3 2 S Tollen's reagent NaBH4

35. C6H8  anti aromatic    B  C   D
Only product Optically active
D on heating gives a major product having x number of stereoisomer, x is:
Ans. 3
Sol. O O O O
O
 3
 CH3 2 S
 H3C C C H 
 Tollen's reagent
H3C C C OH C
B  NaBH4

trans lactide  cis lactide   H3C CH C OH
 d 
OH O
D
36. Cl
H3C CH 2 CH 2 Cl2 , h
CH3 
Monochlorination 
If x = maximum number of monochloroisomer possible
y = Monochloro isomer on fractional distillation will separate. Then find

x  y
2
Ans. 5
Sol. x=6
y=4
x  y = 5
2
37. CH3
NaOEt i Sn  HCl
  COOEt 2   X 
ii 
Y
NO2
Find the number of -bond in the Y?
Ans. 5
Sol. O
C OEt
CH3 CH2
EtO 
 C OEt
NO2 NO2 O
O
O CH2 C
OH
Sn  HCl

 COOEt
NH COOEt COOEt
NH2 NO2

H2O
COOEt
N
Y  H
38. How many of the following are cross-linked polymer?

Bakelite, Urea-formaldehyde, Melamine-formaldehyde, Nylon-6,6, Terylene.
Ans. 3
Sol. Bakelite, Urea-formaldehyde, Melamine-formaldehyde.
39. O
Br
NaOMe 
  A  
i aq. NaOH
ii NaOHCaO  
  B
The number of -bond in product (B) is:
Ans. 1
Sol. O O COOMe
Br
NaOMe
  NaOMe
 
NaOH
COOH
NaOH/CaO
 
40. 1.2 gram of acetophenone on reaction with 76.2 gram of I2 in presence of NaOH give solid
iodoform with 75% yield. Find the weight of iodoform formed in gram.
Ans. 3
O O
|| ||
Sol. Ph  C CH3  3I2  4NaOH 
 CHI3  Ph  C ONa
O
||
1 mole of Ph  C CH3 will give 1 mole of CHI3
120 gram will give  394 g CHI3
1.2 gram will give  3.94 g CHI3
75
Hence, with 75% yield  3.94   2.955 gram
100
 3 gram.
41. In the following sequence of reaction the degree of unsaturation in the (B) is
CO2 Et
CO2 Et Tautomerise
HCl, 
 

 A  
 B  An aromatic compound 
H3C O
Ans. 4
Sol. CH3
CH3
CO2Et CH3
CO2Et HCl,  Tautomerise

 
O  
 OH
H3C O O
O
A B 
Degree of unsaturation = 4
42. How many will liberates CO2 gas on reaction with NaHCO3?
O O C
H3C C CH2 C CH3, H

, CH3  SO2CHSO2CH3 ,
SO 3H
, CN – CH2 – CN
Ans. 1
Sol. SO 3H
, Re st all have pK a value greater than H2CO 3 .
43. NH2
CH3Br Moist Ag2 O Hot alkaline KMnO 4 Ba OH 


Excess
 A  
 B   C  
2
D
If number of carbon atom in D is x and -bond is y.

Find x + y?
Ans. 6
Sol. CH3
H3C CH3
+
NH2 N O
COOH
Ag O Hot KMnO4 Ba OH 
CH Br
3 
2
  (H2C) 4
Excess   2
 

COOH
SECTION – D
44. 2.25 g of a nitrogenous compound having molecular formula (C2H7N) is reacted with 11.95 g of
CHCl3 in presence of alc. KOH to form a bad smelling gas. One of the remaining reactant after
some times becomes poisonous due to aerial oxidation. This poisonous gas is now removed by
C2H5OH to form a precipitate. Find the weight of precipitate (in gram).
Ans. 00005.90
alc KOH
Sol. C2H5NH2  CHCl3   C2H5NC
1 1 0
20 10 1
0 1 20
20
O , h
CHCl3 
2
 COCl2
COCl2  2C2H5 OH   C2H5  2 CO3
1
Hence precipitate =  118  5.9 gram
20
45. O O
CH3
i H3O
ii   B    C 
O O 
O CH3
O
A 
1.1 mole of (A) was reacted according to above reaction. ‘C’ is the gas produced which turns lime
water milky. The amount of C formed in gram will be? (Given At. Wt. of C, O, H are 12, 16, 1 gm
respectively).
Ans. 00096.80
Sol. O
CH3
HOOC COOH H3C

HO 
O
 A   3 
  2CO 2
HOOC COOH
C
CH3 H3C O
B 
1.1 mole of (A) produce 2.2 mole of CO2(g)
 wt. of CO2 = 2.2 × 44 = 96.8 gm.
 O i H
46. A  C4H6  3
CH  S
 B 
 ii   C
3 2 Aromatic compound
6.75 gram
A is a cyclic isomer having molecular formula C4H6. How many gram of C would be formed if 6.75
g of A was taken?
Ans. 00008.50
Sol. O O

O3 H
 H C CH2 CH2 C H 
CH3 2 S
A O
B   C
6.75 1
Moles of A   mole
54 8
1
Hence, mole of C would be formed
8
1
Wt. of C =  68  8.5 gm
8
SECTION – A
Straight Objective Type
This section contains 3 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D),
out of which only one is correct
47. The length of medians of a triangle are 3, 4 and 5 cm. The area (in square cm) of the triangle is
(A) 8
(B) 12
(C) 24
(D) 32
Ans. A
4 1
Sol. A  34  8
3 2
48. The number of right-angled ABC (A = 90º) with integers side length whose inradius is 3 are
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 8
Ans. A
A
Sol.   s  a  tan    r (A = 90º)
2
(s – a) = r, 2s – 2a = 2r, b + c – a = 2r, a = (b + c – 2r)
2
(b – 6)(c – 6) = 2  3
49. P is a point inside an equilateral triangle ABC such that PA = 9, PB = 12 and PC = 15, then side
length of the ABC is
(A) 225  108 5
(B) 225  33
(C) 49  5 2
(D) none of these
Ans. A
152  92   AC 
2 A(B)
Sol. cos    60º   ..... (1)
2.15.9 12 B
9 90º P
9 3
Also, cos   
15 5  15 60º
P 60º 15
So, a  225  108 5
60º
15
B C
One OR More Than One Choice Type
its answer, out of which only one or more than one is/are correct
50. Which of the following are INCORRECT?
 
(A) (sin x)sin x > (cos x)cos x  x   0, 
 4
  
(B) (cos x)sin x < (sin x)cos x  x   0, 
 12 
3  
(C) x cot x <  x   0, 
  3
 
(D) sin x  cos2x  sin x  cos2x  x   0, 
 4
Ans. A, B, C
Sol. (A) Use Jensen’s inequality for sin x < cos x < sin x + cos x with weights
1 = tan x and 2 = 1 – tan x ( 0 < x < /4), 1 and 2 are positive)
So, log(cos x) = log(tan x sin x + (1 – tan x)(sin x + cos x))
> tan x log(sin x) + (1 – tan x)log(sin x + cos x)
 sin x + cos x > 1 and tan x < 1. So, log(cos x) > tan x log(sin x)
    cos x   sin x 
(B) For x   0,  ; cos x > sin x. So, ln  ln
 12  cos x sin x
(C) Shown in the figure
m(OP) > m(OQ)
P
Q
x  
3 2
(D)  (a + b)p  ab + bp for a, b > 0 and 0  p  1
51. Which of the following are INCORRECT?
1 7
(A)  sin20º 
3 20
x2 x4  
(B) cos x  1    x   0, 
2 16  2
x3 2x 5  
(C) tan x  x   x  0, 
3 15  2
(D) cos 2º and cos 7º are irrational
Ans. A, C
Sol. Use sin 3t = 3 sin t – 4 sin3 t

Let t = 20º
52. Let x – 2y – 5 = 0 be the directrix of a parabola and x – y – 7 = 0 be the tangent drawn to the
parabola at the point P(4, –3), then which of the following are INCORRECT?
16
(A) length of latus rectum =
5
8
(B) harmonic mean of length of segments of the focal chord =
5
(C) intersection point of the directrix and the given tangent is (9, 2)
(D) circle drawn on assuming P(4, –3) and Q as diameter, always passes through focus of
the parabola (where Q is the intersection point of tangent and directrix)
Ans. A, B
Sol. Foot of perpendicular P(4, –3) to the directrix is (3, –1)

  3   1 2  3  1  7 
Now, find its image about the tangent  
1 1 2
 = 6,  = –4. So, focus  (6, –4)
685 9
Now, distance of focus from the directrix = 
5 5
53. Let ABCD be a quadrilateral inscribed in a circle. Suppose AB  2  2 and AB subtends 135º
at the centre of the circle, the maximum possible area of ABCD is
53 3
(A)
4 2
8 7
(B)
3
19  3
(C)
2
(D) none of these
Ans. A
Sol.  , ,  <  and y = sin x is concave downward on (0, ) C

sin   sin   sin  
So,  sin    sin75º
3  3 

1 1 D 
So, area of ABCD  sin 135º    sin   sin   sin  
2 2 
135 B
53 3
=
4 2
Equality holds if  =  =  = 75º A
54. If the vertices of an equilateral  lies on the curve 8x3 + y3 + 6xy = 1, then
6
(A) side length of the triangle is
15
3
(B) side length of the triangle is
2
3 3
(C) area of the triangle is
5
3 3
(D) area of the triangle is
16
Ans. A, C
6
Sol. (2x + y – 1)(4x2 + y2 + 1 – 2xy + y + 2x) = 0 and side length of the  =
15
3 3
So, area =
5

(B), (C) and (D).
Diameter of ellipse is a line passing through the centre of the ellipse. Consider the set of parabola(s)
having common chord of minimum length with the diameter of the ellipse x 2 + y2 + xy = 8 and the line
mx – y + 4 = 0 as directrix
55. The set of value(s) of m for which only one parabola is possible is
(A)  2, 2 
(B)  5, 3 
(C) {–2, 2}
(D) none of these
Ans. A
56. The range of value(s) of m for which two parabola(s) are possible is
(A)  ,  2    2,  
(B) (–, –2)  (2, )
(C)  ,  3    3,  
(D) none of these
Ans. A
Sol. (55.-56.)
For the ellipse x2 + y2 + xy = 8, c  (0, 0)
8 8 r2
For one parabola  : ( C1C2 = r1 + r2)
2 3
m 1
For two parabola(s) : C1C2 < r1 + r2  4 4 
c2  , 
r1  6 6
 4 4 
c1   , 
 6 6
SECTION – C
This section contains 10 questions. Each question, when worked out will result in one integer from 0 to
9 (both inclusive).
57. Consider the ellipse 4x2 + y2 – 8x + 4y + 4 = 0. Pair of tangents PT1 and PT2 are drawn to the
ellipse from P(–8, –2). Let S1' be the image of S1 about PT1 and S'2 be the image of S2 about

PT2, then if PS1S 2'   and PS1' S 2   , then is equal to _____

Ans. 1
Sol. PS1' S 2 and PS1S'2 are similar
58. If tangents drawn to the parabola at A(1, 2) and B(5, 8) intersect at (–1, 8), then slope of directrix
a
is where gcd(a, b) = 1, then a + b is _____
b
Ans. 7
3
Sol. Q = mid-point of AB = (3, 5), let P  (–1, 8), m(PQ) = 
4
4
Slope of directrix =
3
59. Given a point (3, 2), then the minimum perimeter of a triangle with one vertex at (3, 2) one on the
x-axis and one on the line y = x (you may assume that a triangle with minimum perimeter exists)
is  , then sum of digits of  is _____
Ans. 8
Sol. For minimum perimeters (2, 3), (d, d) (c, 0), (3, –2) are collinear
Hence, mini perimeter = 26
60. If focus of the parabola which touches x = 0, y = 0, x – y + 1 = 0 and –2x – y – 8 = 0 is (, ), then

is _____

Ans. 3
Sol. Focus is intersection point of circles x(x + 1) + y(y – 1) = 0 and (x)(x + 4) + (y)(y + 8) = 0
 6 2
  , 
 5 5
12
61. If 3 2 , 4 2 and 2 be the altitudes of a triangle, then r 2 (r is inradius of the triangle) is
5
equal to _____
Ans. 2
Sol.  Harmonic mean of the altitudes of a triangle is 3 times its inradius

1  5 1 1 
So, r     
19  12 2 4 2 3 2 
62. Let ABC be a triangle (with A = /3) and a circle C1 be drawn lying in side the triangle, touching
its in-circle externally and also touching the two sides AB and AC, then ratio of the radii of the
circles C1 and C is k, then 3k is equal to _____
Ans. 1
Sol. In triangle II1K A A/2

A r1
1  sin   M
 A  IK
sin    
r  r1
  2   r  r1  r  r1 I
1
 2  II1 r  r1  A  r  r1  r  r1
1  sin   r N
2
K
   A  r1 r1 1 I
tan2  2
  . So,  tan  30º  
 4  r r 3 B C
63. Let BD be the internal angle bisectors of angle B in triangle ABC with D on side AC. The
circumcircle of triangle BDC meets AB at E, while the circumcircle of triangle ABD meets BC at F.
if AE = 3, then CF is equal to
Ans. 3
Sol. Let circumcircle of triangle BDC be S1 and the circumcircle of triangle A

ABD be S2
E D
AD AB
So,  ..... (1)
CD BC
B C
Now, for circle S1: F
AE  AB = AD  AC S1
AD  AC
 AE  ..... (2) S2
AB
For circle S2:
CF  CB = CD  CA
CD  CA
 CF  ..... (3)
CB
From equation (2) and (3), we get
AE AD  CB
 ..... (4)
CF AB  CD
From equation (1) and (4), AE = CF
So, CF = 3
64. In an isosceles right angled triangle ABC, CA = CB = 1, and P is an arbitrary point on the
perimeter of ABC, then if maximum value of PA·PB·PC is , then 6 2 is _____
Ans. 3
Sol. (I): Let P  AC C

1
PA·PC  and PB  2
4
2 P
Thus PA·PC·PB 
4
The two equality sign can not be valid at the same time
2 A B
So, PA  PC  PB 
4
(II): P  AB C

AP  x  0, 2 
So, let f(x) = (PA)2(PB)2)PC)2
2
 2  x  1  x
= x2 2
x 2 
 1
Let t  x  2  x  : t  0, 
 2 A P B
2
So, f(x) = g(t) = t (1 – t)
 1 1
 f  x  gt   g  
 2 8
1
PA  PB  PC  . Clearly P is the mid-point of AB
2 2
3
  1  4x 2  4
65. Number of solution of the equation  cos1  2
   x  x sin x  cos x is
 2
  1  4x 
Ans. 2
Sol. Shown in the figure
(0, –1)
1 2
66. Two circles C1, C2 of radii and touch each other externally and they both touch a unit circle
3 7
C internally. A circle C3 of radius R is inscribed to touch the circles C1, C2 externally and the circle
C internally, then 19R is equal to _____
Ans. 2
1 2

2
Sol. R 3 7 
1 2 19
1 
3 7
SECTION – D
67. If the exhaustive set of x  (0, 2) for which  n the inequality sin x + sin 2x + sin 3x + ..... +
3 3 1   2
sin(nx)  is valid 1  x   2 , k  I, then is _____
2 2
Ans. 00002.00
2 2
Sol. Clearly, 0 < x < not valid, for  x  2
3 3
x  2x  1  x x
cos    cos  x cos    1 cot  
sin x   2   2 

2
   4  3
x x 2 2
2 sin   2 sin  
2 2
 
68. The least numbers A such that for any two squares of combined area 1 and a rectangle, of area A
exists such that the two squares can be packed in the rectangle (without interior overlap). You
may assume that the sides of the squares are parallel to the sides of the rectangle, is _____
Ans. 00001.20
2 2
Sol. If x and y are the sides of two squares then x + y = 1
Let without loss of generality x  y
So, shorter side of the rectangle should be at least x
Longer side at least and (x + y)
So, A  x(x + y)
 
Put x = cos , y = sin ,   0, 
 4
1 2    1 2 
A  cos  2    equality holds if  
2 2  4  2 8
69. The least possible area of a convex set in plane that intersects both branches of the hyperbola
xy = 1 and both branches of the hyperbola xy = –1 is _____
Ans. 00004.00
Sol. For minimum area x = y = z = w

Amin = 4  1 
 y,   1
 y   x, 
 x
 1 
 1  w, 
 z,   w
 z
FIITJEE
PART TEST – III
JEE (Advanced)-2019
PAPER –1
TEST DATE: 16-12-2018
 Each Part is further divided into Three Sections: Section-A, Section-B & Section-C.
Section–A (01 – 10, 21 – 30, 41 – 50) contains 30 multiple choice questions which have one or
more than one correct answer. Each question carries +4 marks for correct answer and –2 marks
for wrong answer.
Section–B (11 – 12, 31 – 32, 51 – 52) contains 6 Match the following Type questions. Each
question having 4 statements in Column I & 5 statements in Column II with any given statement
in Column I having correct matching with 1 or more statement (s) given in Column II. Each
statement carries +2 marks for correct answer and –1 mark for wrong answer.
Section–C (13 – 20, 33 – 40, 53 – 60) contains 24 Numerical based questions with answers as
negative marking.
AITS-PT-III (Paper-1)-PCM-JEE(Advanced)/19 2
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
(One OR More Than One Choice Type)
This section contains 10 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D)
for its answer, out of which only one or more than one is/are correct
1. Two spherical planets P and Q have the same uniform density , masses MP and MQ and
surface areas A and 4A respectively. A spherical planet R also has uniform density  and its
mass is (MP + MQ). The escape velocities from the planets P, Q and R are v P, vQ and vR
respectively. Then
(A) vQ > vR > v P
(B) vR > vQ > v P
vR
(C) 3
vP
vP 1
(D) 
vQ 2
2. Two identical blocks are floating once in water (case-I) and once in mercury container (case –II).
They are floating very near to each other. Choose the correct option(s).
(A) In case –I, both blocks get attracted to each other.
(B) In case –I, both blocks get repelled from each other.
(C) In case –II, both blocks get attracted to each other.
(D) In case –II, both blocks get repelled from each other.
3. The pitch of a screw gauge is 0.5 mm and there are 100 divisions on it’s circular scale. The
instrument reads 2 circular divisions when nothing is put in between its jaws. In measuring the
diameter of a wire, there are 8 divisions on the main scale and 83rd division coincides with the
reference line. Then choose the correct option(s).
(A) Screw gauge is having zero error of 0.01 mm.
(B) Screw gauge is having zero error of 0.49 mm.
(C) Diameter of the wire is 4.405 mm.
(D) Diameter of the wire is 4.425 mm.
4. Heavy stable nucleus have more neutrons than protons. This is because of the fact that
(A) neutrons are heavier than protons.
(B) electrostatic force between protons are repulsive.
(C) neutrons decay into protons through beta decay.
(D) nuclear forces between neutrons are weaker than that between protons.
5. Two point monochromatic and coherent sources of light of wavelength 

are each placed as shown in the figure. The initial phase difference d
between the sources is zero. If D >>d, select the correct option(s). O
S1 S2
(during the counting exclude fringes at infinity)
D
7
(A) If d  , O will be minima. Screen
2 (planar)
(B) If d = , only one maxima can be observed on screen.
(C) If d = 4.8 , then a total 8 minima would be there on screen.
5
(D) If d  , then intensity at O would be minimum.
2
3 AITS-PT-III (Paper-1)-PCM-JEE(Advanced)/19
6. Sound of wavelength  passes through a Quincke’s tube, which is adjusted to give a maximum
I
intensity I0. Through what distance should the sliding tube be moved to give an intensity 0 .
2
7
(A)
8
3
(B)
4
(C) /4
(D) /8
7. Assume that the nuclear binding energy per Ebn

nucleon (Ebn) versus mass number (A) is as
8
shown in the figure. Use this plot to choose
the correct choice(s) given below:
(A) Fusion of two nuclei with mass 6
number lying in the range of 1 < A <
50 will release energy. 4
(B) Fusion of two nuclei with mass
numbers lying in the range of 51 < A 2
< 100 will release energy.
(C) Fission of a nucleus lying in the mass 0
range of 100 < A < 200 will release 0 100 200 A
energy when breaks into two equal
fragments.
(D) Fission of a nucleus lying in the mass
range of 200 < A < 260 will release
energy when broken into two equal
fragment.
8. Three identical biconvex lenses of focal length f are aligned with two neighbouring lenses
separated by a distance f as shown in the figure. A small object is located at a distance f/2 in front
of the leftmost lens. Choose the correct option(s).
f/2 f f
(A) The final image formed is real and inverted.
(B) The final image formed is virtual and erect.
(C) The final image is of same size as that of object.
(D) The final image formed is virtual and inverted.
9. Kepler’s law states that

I. the orbit of planets are elliptical with one focus at the sun.
II. A line connecting the sun and a planet sweeps out equal areas in equal times and
III. the square the period of a planet’s orbit is proportional to the cube of its semi-major axis.
1
Which of these laws would remain true if the force of gravity were proportional to 25 , rather than
r
1
?
r2
(A) only I
(B) only II
(C) only I and II
(D) none of these
10. Four classes of students measures the height of a building. Each class uses a different method
and each measures the height many different times. The data for each class are plotted below.
Which class made the most PRECISE measurement?
No. of trials
Known height
30
20
(A) 10
0 10 20 30 40 50
Height (m)
No. of trials
Known height
30
20
(B) 10
0 10 20 30 40 50
Height (m)
No. of trials
Known height
30
20
(C) 10
0 10 20 30 40 50
Height (m)
No. of trials
Known height
30
20
(D) 10
0 10 20 30 40 50
Height (m)
SECTION - B
Matrix – Match Type
This section contains 2 questions. Each question contains statements given in two columns, which have
to be matched. The statements in Column I are labelled A, B, C and D, while the statements in Column II
are labelled p, q, r, s and t. Any given statement in Column I can have correct matching with ONE OR
MORE statement(s) in Column II.
11. Column –I contains four different YDSE systems and Column –II contains intensity measured at
some points on the screen. Do the correct match(es) in Column-I and Column –II. (CP1 = 0.3 mm
and CP2 = 1.2 mm)
Column I Column II
y
P2
P1
C
d = 1 mm
(A) d D=1m (p) IC = 4I0
Intensity at each slit = I0
D
 = 4000 Å in air
y
P2
d = 1 mm
P1
C
D=1m
(B) d Intensity at each slit = I0 and (q) IP1  2I0
w = 4/3 no absorption of light by
D
water (w = 4/3)
 = 4000 Å in air
y
Glass
P2 d = 1 mm
film D=1m
P1
C Film thickness t = 0.8 m
(C) d refractive index of film = 3/2 (r) IP1  4I0
Intensity at each slit = I0 and
D
no absorption of light by
glass
 = 4000 Å in air
y
P2
P1
C
d = 1 mm
104 rad =  d IP1  0
(D) D=1m (s)
Intensity at each slit = I0
D
 = 4000 Å in air
(t) IP2  2I0
12. Column-I contains some systems having a solid body and fluid. Column-II contains some physical
quantities for the systems in column-I. Match column- II with column-I.
Column I Column II
A solid sphere of radius
Atmospheric pressure = P0 R is tied inside a non-
viscous liquid and the
R
x system is in equilibrium Fx (force on surface x
y (sphere just touching applied by liquid)
(A) (p) 1
the top surface of the
= P0 R2  R3 g
liquid). x-upper half 3
Density of liquid =  spherical surface y-
Density of solid = () lower half spherical
surface.
Atmospheric pressure = P0
A solid disc of radius R,
2R/3 thickness R/3 is tied Fy (Force on surface y
inside a non-viscous applied by liquid)
(B) R liquid and the system is (q)
x y 5
R/3 in equilibrium x-rim of = P0 R2  R3 g
the disc y-one of the 3
Density of liquid = 
Density of solid = () flat faces of disc.
A solid sphere of radius

Atmospheric pressure = P0 R is moving upward
4R
with a terminal velocity
Force of buoyancy on
R vt inside a viscous
vt 5R/3 sphere or disc
liquid and the beaker is
(C) (r) (FB) – weight of sphere or
x y at rest. x-surface of the
disc (W) is certainly
beaker base just below
Density of liquid =  positive
the sphere y-remaining
Density of solid = () surface of the beaker
base
A solid disc of radius
Atmospheric pressure = P0 2R and height 4R/3 is
x placed inside a liquid,
5R/3 whose lower part is
y partially open to
P0
(D) atmosphere and the (s)  <  (necessarily)
disc is in equilibrium.
3R 2R x-top surface of the
Density of liquid =  disc y-bottom surface
Density of solid = () of the disc which is in
contact with liquid.
(t)  >  (necessarily)
SECTION – C
(both inclusive).
R
13. At a depth h1  from the surface of a planet (radius R = 3000 km), acceleration due to gravity is
2
g1. It’s value changes by g1, when one moves down further by 1 km. At a height h2 above the
surface of the earth acceleration due to gravity is g2. It’s value changes by g2 when moves up
further by 1 km. If g1 = g2 and h2 = d  102 km. Find d. (Assume the planet to be a uniform
sphere of radius R) (Take 21/ 3  1.3 )
14. A massless metal plate is placed on a horizontal tabletop lubricated with oil. The sheet is a
square of side length  = 1.0 m and the oil layer has thickness h = 1.0 mm. Initially one edge of
the sheet coincides with one edge of the table. The sheet is pulled outwards without rotation with
2
a constant force F = 15 N. If coefficient of viscosity of the oil is  = 0.2 N-s/m , how long (in
second) will it take to pull half of the sheet out of the table?
15. Figure shows a cubical block of side 10 cm and relative density 1.5
suspended by a wire of cross sectional area 106 m2. The breaking stress
of the wire is 7  106 N/m2. The block is placed in a beaker of base area
200 cm2 and initially at t = 0, the top surface of water and block coincide. 2 cm3/s
There is a pump at the bottom corner which ejects 2 cm 3 of water per
second. If the wire breaks at t = 10k seconds, find k. (Take g = 10 m/s2)
16. If is found that the spectral line of a certain star periodically becomes a doublet indicating that the
radiation comes actually from two stars revolving about their centre of mass. Assuming the
masses of the stars to be equal, find the distance between them if the maximum splitting of the

spectral lines is equal to  1.2  104 and it occurs every  = 30 days. Give your answer in

terms of d  107 km (approximately) and write d.
17. Find the second longest resonance wavelength (in m) in a string of length  = 6 m for which a
9
point at x = m is an anti-node, where x is distance measured along the length of the string from
4
a fixed end. (string is fixed at both ends)
18. An ideal fluid flows through a pipe of circular cross section of radius r at speed v 0 = 4m/s. Now a
viscous liquid is made to flow through the same pipe at the same volume flow rate (measured in
m3/s). Find the maximum speed of the viscous liquid particle in the pipe in m/s.
19. A string SQ is connected to a long heavier string at Q. y

Linear mass density of the heavier string is 4 times of the
string SQ. Length of SQ is 9.5 cm. Both the strings are
subjected to same tension. A 50 Hz source connected at S
produces transverse disturbance in the string. Wavelength S
9.5 cm Q
of the wave in string SQ is observed to be 1 cm. If the
source is switched on at time t = 0 and the smallest time (in
sec) at which a point in the heavier string would oscillate in
T
phase with the source at S is . Find T.
10
20. A particle of mass m = 9 gm is trapped between two perfectly rigid parallel walls. The particle
bounces back and forth between the walls without losing any energy. From a wave point of view,
the particle trapped between the walls is like a standing wave in stretched string between the
walls. Distance between the two walls is L = 1 m. Calculate the energy difference between third
energy state and the ground state (lowest energy state) of the particle. Answer the energy
difference in C  1065 Joule. (Take Planck’s constant h = 6  1034 J-sec)
SECTION – A
21. Which of the following gives precipitate with (NH4)2S in aqueous medium?
3+
(A) Fe
3+
(B) Al
(C) Cr3+
(D) Co2+
22. Which of the following statement is correct? (Neglect vibrational degree of freedom)
5
(A) Molar internal energy due to motion is RT of diatomic gas molecules.
2
(B) Molar internal energy due to motion is 3RT of bent triatomic gas molecule.
5
(C) Molar internal energy due to motion is RT of triatomic linear gas molecules.
2
3
(D) Molar internal energy due to motion is RT of monoatomic gas molecules.
2
23. Select the incorrect statement (s)

(A) above Kraft’s temperature and critical micelle concentration, micelle formation take place.
(B) tetra ethyl lead acts as positive catalyst when mixed with petrol for combustion.
(C) higher the gold number more will be the protecting power towards coagulation.
(D) alum purify the water by forming silicate complex with mud particles.
24. 1.350 gm sample of Co NH3 5 SO24Br  (molar mass = 320) is dissolved to prepare 200 ml
solution. Osmotic pressure of this solution is found to be 1.039 atm at 27oC. Which statement/s
is/are correct for this solution? [The above complex does not form yellow ppt. with AgNO3]
(A) Each molecule gives two ions in solution.
(B) The complex Co(NH3)5SO4Br is completely soluble under given condition.
(C) Molarity of complex ion [Co(NH3)5Br]2+ is 0.021 M in the solution.
(D) The van’t Hoff factor of the complex is = 2.
25. Which of the following is/are correct for spontaneous isothermal chemical reaction?
(A) H  0, because T  0
(B) S  0
(C) U  0 , because T  0
(D) G  0
26. The order of hybridization of the central atom in the following species:
2 
PtCl4  , AuCl4  , Ni  CO 4  ,  Au CN2 
Along with increasing order of oxidation state are
3 3 2
(A) sp , sp, sp , dsp
3 3 3
(B) sp , sp, sp , sp
(C) sp3, sp, dsp2, dsp2
(D) sp3, sp, dsp2, sp3
27. There are three bottles having halides in a lab. One of them containing a yellow compound
another has red compound and the last one has touch sensitive explosive. Which of the following
combination is possible?
(A) AgI, HgI2, SnCl4
(B) PbBr2, HgI2, NI3
(C) AgBr, SbCl3, SnCl2
(D) FeCl3, CrCl3, NF3
28. By which of the following method(s) Cl2 can be prepared?

(A) 2KMnO 4  16HCl  2KCl  2MnCl2  8H2O  5Cl2
(B) At anode, by the electrolysis of aqueous NaCl
(C) 4HCl  MnO 2  MnCl2  Cl2  2H2O
(D) HOCl  HCl  Cl2  H2O

(A) Trapping of an electron in the anion vacancy leads to the formation of F-centre defects.
(B) In a fcc unit cell, the body centre is an octahedral voids.
(C) 
The edge length of the unit cell in NaCl is 552 pm rNa  95 pm, rCl  181 pm 
(D) The coordination number of ions in cesium halide crystal is 8.
30. Which of the following statements is/are correct?

(A) Temperature of an ideal gas does not change when it expands adiabatically in vacuum.
(B) H, U, T,Q are zero for expansion in vaccum under adiabatic.conditions.
(C) On increasing the temperature compressibility of real gas decreases.
(D) Dalton’s law of partial pressure is applicable at equilibrium for a reacting gaseous mixture.
SECTION - B
31. Match the characteristics of Column – I with the characteristics in Column – II

 m  molar conductance at molarity M 
 o 
 m  molar conductance at infinite dilution 
Column-I Column-II
(A) Conductivity of an electrolytic solution (p)
decreases
 
C 2m /  om om  m where C is conc.
(B)  oCH3 COOH at 25oC (q) With increase of concentration
(C) K a of weak electrolyte (r) o

 KCl at 25oC
(D) Conductivity of an electrolytic solution (s) o

 KCl o
at 25 C
increases
(t) On decreasing the concentration
32. Match the characteristics of Column – I with the characteristics in Column – II

Column-I Column-II
(A) Co 2   KNO  CH COOH   (p) Brown ppt.
2 3
(B) Ni2  DMG  (q) Blue ppt.
(C) Cu2  K 4 Fe  CN6  

 (r) White ppt.
(D) Al3  NH4 2 S 

2

HO (s) Red ppt.
(t) Yellow ppt.
SECTION – C
(both inclusive).
33.  m of 10-3 M of a weak acid is 0.0142  10  x ohm1cm2 / mol .  om  450 ohm1cm2 / mol at
25oC, Ka of acid is 10-6. The value of ‘x’ is
34. The rate of diffusion of hydrogen gas is 5 5 times of that of a hydrocarbon at identical
temperature and pressure if the molecular formula of hydrocarbon is CnH2n – 2 . The value of (n/2)
is
35. In Fluorite type structure of X 2 & Y  compound if we remove anions from one body diagonal
and cations from all the corners then unit cell formula becomes Xn Ym : n  m  z, z is:
36. EMF of the following half-cell Pt | H2(g) | H+ (aq) is 0.177 if the pH2  1 atm then calculate the pH
of solution?
37. G for the reaction at 500oC is

2 4
Al2O3   Al  O2 G  1930 kJ / mole
3 3
The potential difference for this electrolytic reduction of Al2O3 at 500oC is ‘V’ volt.
‘V’ is
38. Calculate the volume (in ml) of 0.1 M AgNO3 required for complete precipitation of chloride ions
present in 20 ml of 0.03 M solution of [Cr(H2O)5Cl2]Cl, as AgCl is:
39. How many of the following reaction are correct?


(i)  Na  XeF7 
XeF6  NaF 
 
  XeF3  SbF6 
(ii) XeF4  SbF5 
(iii) 6XeF4  12H2 O 
 4Xe  2XeO3  24HF  3O2
(iv) XeF6  H2O 
 XeOF4  2HF
(v) XeF6  2H2 O 
 XeO 2F2  4HF
(vi) NaNO3  Zn  powder   NaOH 

 NH3  Na2 ZnO2
40. How many of these gives metal by self reduction method?

HgS, PbS, Cu2S, FeS, ZnS, Na2S
SECTION – A
41. A matrix of order 3  3 is given as A = [aij], where aij  {–1, 1}  i, j then possible values of |A| is
(where |A| is determinant of matrix A)
(A) 2
(B) –2
(C) 0
(D) –4
30
42. If value of 3P = C5 – 30C6 + 30C7 – ..... – 30C28 + 29, and value of
Q
CR = 100C6 + 4 100C7 + 6 100C8 + 4 100C9 + 100C10, then
(A) number of positive divisors of P are 16
(B) Q + R can be divisible either by 9 or 19
(C) if abcd = P, a, b, c, d  I+, then possible number of order pairs of (a, b, c, d) are 44
(D) P is an even integer
43. The number of integral solution of the equation  +  +  +  = 18, with the condition that 1    5,
–2    4, 0    5, 3    9, is k, then
(A) Total number of prime factors of k are 7
(B) Exponent of 5 in k! is 13
k 
(C) Number of non negative integer solutions of the equation x + y + z =   is 15
 12 
(where [.] denotes the greatest integer function)
(D) Number of ordered pair of (a, b, c) such that abc = k4 is 225 (a, b, c  I)
44. If A(1, 2, 3), B(1, 1, 1), C(1, 1, 2) and D(3, –1, 2) are vertices of a tetrahedron, then
x y z
(A) if    1 is a variable plane which is equidistant from all the four vertices A, B, C,
a b c
D, then maximum number of possible triplet of (a, b, c) are 7
(B) the volume of tetrahedron is 2 unit3
(C) length of altitude from point D to the plane ABC is 2 unit
1
(D) if the acute angle between edges AB and CD is , then cos  =
10
45. Let A(0, 6, 8) and B(6, 12, 0) be two given points and P(, 0, 0) be a point on x-axis such that
PA + PB is minimum, then
90
(A) if point Q is on the y-axis such that QA + QB is minimum then area of POQ is unit2,
7
where O is origin
240 3
(B) the volume of tetrahedron OPAB (where O is origin) is unit
11
(C) perpendicular distance from the point A to the plane containing the points P, Q, B is 8 unit
480
(D) the volume of tetrahedron OPAB (where O is origin) is unit3
11
46. If z1 = 4 + 3i, z2 = 1 – i and z3 = 7 + ki, k  R such that z1, z2, z3 are vertices of an isosceles
triangle for different values of k, then
(A) if k1, k2, ..... kn are distinct possible values of k, then value of [|k1|] + [|k2|] + ..... + [|kn|] is
11 (where [.] denotes the greatest integer function)
(B) one of the possible values of area of ABC is 12 unit2
(C) if k1, k2, ....., kn are distinct possible values of k, then value of [|k1|] + [|k2|] + ..... + [|kn|] is 3
(D) if k1, k2, ..... kn are distinct possible value of k, then value [|k1 + k2 + k3 + ..... + kn|] is 3
47. If P is a non null matrix of order 3  3 with real number as entries, such P3 = O, where O is null
matrix of order 3  3, then (where I is the identity matrix of order 3  3)
(A) det of (4P2 – 2P + I) is a non-zero number
(B) I – 2P is an invertible matrix
2
(C) if matrix P has all integer entries, then det(I – 4P ) = 0
2
(D) if matrix P has all integer entries, then absolute value of det (I – 4P ) = 1
    2  2  2
48. Let a , b and c are three unit vectors such that a  b  b  c  c  a  3 , then
3    5
(A)  abc 
2 2
   
(B) ab  bc
  
(C) a  2b  3c  20
  
(D) a , b , c form a system of orthogonal vectors
49. Let z1, z2, z3 be complex numbers representing vertices A, B, C of a triangle. It is known that
 
|z1| = |z2| = |z3| = 1, and there exists    0,  such that z1 + z2 cos  + z3 sin  = 0, then
 2
(A) ABC can be an isosceles triangle, with greatest side length of 2 unit
1
(B) the maximum value of area of ABC is unit2
2 2 1  
(C) triangle ABC can be a right angled triangle
(D) triangle ABC can not be an equilateral triangle
50. On the side AB and AD of a scalene triangle ABD draw externally squares ABEF and ADGH with
centres O and Q respectively if M is mid-point of side BD, then
(A) OM : QM is equal to 1 : 2
(B) OM : QM is equal to 1 : 1
(C) (OM)2 + (QM)2 > (OQ)2
(D) (OM)2 + (QM)2 = (OQ)2
SECTION - B
51. Match the following Column-I with Column-II

Column – I Column – II
(A) If the coefficient of x2r is greater than half of the coefficient of x2r–1 in
(p) 2
the expansion of (1 + x)15, then possible value(s) of |r – 4| is/are
(B) The number of 3-digit number pqr such that we can construct an
isosceles triangle with side length p, q and r is , then  is divisible (q) 3
by
(C) Let a, b, c be complex numbers such that |a| = |b| = |c| > 0 and
(r) 4
az2 + bz + c = 0, then possible value(s) of |z| + 2 is/are
(D) If the number of ordered triplets of (x, y, z) such that
x, y, z  {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8} with the condition that z > max{x, y} is (s) 5
k, then factors of k is/are
(t) 6
52. Match the following Column-I with Column-II

Column – I Column – II
(A) The probability that a randomly selected positive divisor of 1099 is an
p
integer multiple of 1088, is , (p and q are coprime), then possible (p) 2
q
divisors of (q – p) is/are
(B) Three distinct vertices are randomly selected among the vertices of
a cube. The probability that these vertices form an isosceles triangle
a (q) 3
is , (where a, b are coprime), then (b + a) is divisible by
b
(C) A man can take either 1 step or 3 steps at a time. If he covers a
distance of 10 steps in N number of different ways (without retracing (r) 4
his path at any point), then possible factors of (N)2 is/are
(D) If N be the number of equilateral triangles formed by joining vertices
(s) 5
of a 2018 sided regular polygon, then N is divisible by
(t) 6
SECTION – C
(both inclusive).
53. Let ab be (where ‘a’ is a prime number) the number of function f: A  B, where A = {1, 2, 3, .....,
2019} and B = {2019, 2020, 2021, 2022}, such that f(1) + f(2) + ..... + f(2019) is odd number, then
last digit of number b is _____
54. Let A and B be points (2, 0, 0) and (0, 4, 0) respectively. If E is mid-point of AB and F is mirror
x 1 y  2 z
image of origin with respect to edge AB and let D the point on the line   at 6 unit
0 0 1
distance from the edge AB, then volume of tetrahedron DFAB is _____
55. If A(z1), B(z2), C(z3) and D(z4) are four points in the Argand plane such that z1, z2, z3, z4 are roots
of equation z4 – 5z3 + 18z2 – 17z + 13 = 0, and |z1|  |z3|. Let P is a point of intersection of line
   
z i  3  z 3  i  2 3  0 with the real axis, then value of [(PA)(PC)] is equal to _____
1 p  q
 2017 
56. Let  be a complex cube root of unity and A    1 r  where p, q, r are either  or
 2018 2020 2019 

2
 , then number of such distinct non singular matrix/matrices A is _____
 
57. Let p  î  ˆj  kˆ , q  a î  bjˆ  ckˆ , where a, b, c  {–3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2} if the number of possible
   R
vectors q such that p  q  0 is R, then is _____
5
   
58. If a, b, c are mutually perpendicular unit vectors and d is a unit vector which makes equal angle
      
with a, b and c , then the sum of squares of the possible values of a  b  c  d is _____
59. Number of isosceles triangles formed by joining the vertices of a 2019 sided regular polygon is M,
then the digit at tens place of M is _____
3
x y z
60. Let x, y, z be positive real numbers such that xyz      and 3x + 4y + 5z = 12, then the
3 3 3
3 4 5
value of x + y + z is equal to _____
FIITJEE
PART TEST – III
JEE (Advanced)-2019
PAPER –1
TEST DATE: 16-12-2018
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
1. B, D
2GM 8
Sol. v esc   GR2
R 3
Given that, 4(4RP2 )  (4 R2Q )  RQ = 2RP
Mass of R is MR = MP + MQ
RR3  RP3  R3Q
So, RR = 91/ 3 RP
So, RR > RQ > RP  vR > vQ > v P
v v 1
Also, R  91/3 and P 
vP vQ 2
2. A, C
Sol.
P0 1
P0
2
P1 < P0 P2 > P0
Case-I Case-II
AITS-PT-III (Paper-1)-PCM(Sol.)-JEE(Advanced)/19 2
3. C
0.5
Sol. Least count =  0.005 mm
100
Zero error = 0 + 0.005  2 = 0.01 mm
So, true diameter = 0.5  8 + 0.005  83  0.01 = 4.405 mm
4. B
Sol. Repulsive force between protons forbids heavy nucleus.
5. A, B, D
Sol. x at O = d(path difference is maximum at O)
5 7
So, for d  and , O will be a minimum and for d = , O will be a maximum.
2 2
There would be total 5 minima for d = 4.8 .
6. A, D
I0 I   
Sol.  4 0 cos 2  
2 4  2 
2
and   (2x)

7. B, D
Sol. If two nuclei in the range 51 < A < 100 will fuse then they will produce an element with mass
number above 100 and less than 200 which has more Ebn thus energy is released hence option
(B) is correct.
Similarly a nucleus in the range 200 < A < 260 when broken into two equal fragments then the Ebn
of these fragments will be more than that of the nucleus hence option (D) is correct.
8. A, C
Sol.
Image
Object
f/2 f f f/2
9. B
Sol. The second law is consequence of conservation of angular momentum, which is still true.
10. A
Sol. Accuracy describes how close to the correct or true value a measurement is, while precision in a
measurement of how closely grouped or how well a result can be reproduced of the plots given (A)
demonstrates the closest grouping at data points.
SECTION – B
11. (A)  (p, q); (B)  (p, r); (C)  (p, q); (D)  (s, t)
2 (103 )(3  10 4 ) 3
Sol. (A) P1  
4  10 7 1 2
 3 
P2    (4)  6
 2 
3 AITS-PT-III (Paper-1)-PCM(Sol.)-JEE(Advanced)/19
So, IC  IP2  4I0 and IP1  2I0

 3  4 
(B) P1      2
 2  3 
P2   2  (4)  8
So, IC  IP1  IP2  4I0
2  3  7
(C) C    1  8  10  2
4  107  2 
3 
P1  2  
2 2
P2 | 2  6  | 4
So, IC  IP2  4I0 and IP1  2I0
2 
(D) C  7
(103 )(104 ) 
4  10 2
 3  
P1    
 2 2
   11
P2   6   
 2 2
So, IC  IP2  2I0 and IP1  0
12. (A)  (p, q, r, s); (B)  (q, t); (C)  (r, s); (D)  (q)
1 3
Sol. (A) From free body diagram of the liquid above the sphere, Fx  P0 R2  R g
3
4
Force of buoyancy on the sphere = R3 g
3
5 3
So, Fy  P0 R2  R g
3
1 3
(B) Force of buoyancy on the disc Fx  R g
3
5 3
Fy  P0 R2  R g
3
(C) From the free body diagram of the liquid in the container Fx and Fy are different with option (p)
and (q)
 R 4
(D) Fx   P0  g  4 R2  4P0R2  gR 3
 3  3
 5R  2 5
Fy   P0  g  R  P0 R 2  gR3
 3  3
2
Force on the part open to atmosphere = P03R
1 4R
So, FB  gR3  4R2 g  N (N = normal reaction)
3 3

 
16
SECTION – C
13. 9
 h  g
Sol. g1  g  1  1   g1   h1
 R R
R2 2gR 2
and g2  g  g2   h2
(R  h2 )2 (R  h2 )3
given that, g1 = g2
So, h2 = R 21/3  1  900 km
14. 5
Sol. In this case,
v
F   (  x)
h
Fh dx
 v 
(  x) dt x F
3 3
So, t   5 sec
8Fh
15. 2
Sol. Tension in the wire at t = 0 is, T0 = (0.1)3(103)(1.5 1) (10) = 5N
Wire breaks at tension, T = 7  106  106 = 7N
So volume of ejected water = 200 cm 3
So time taken = 100 sec.
16. 3
Sol. One star is approaching, while the other is receding.
cv cv 2v
So,       
c c c
2R
So,  =
c
c c
 2R    3  107 km
 
17. 1
Sol. Possible frequencies which will satisfy condition of both ends rigid
m T
f1  , where  is length of the string
2 
3
and all possible frequencies which will satisfy condition of string of length with one end rigid
8
and one end free
2n  1 T
f2 
 3  
4 
 8 
So, f 1 = f 2  3m  8n = 4
So,  = /6 = 1 m
18. 8
Sol. Volume flow rate of ideal fluid = v 0R2
R
 r2 
Volume flow rate of the viscous fluid = v  1
0 0  R2  2rdr

 R 2 R2  v 0 R2
 v 0 2     v 0 R2
 2 4  2
 v 0  2v 0  8 m/s
19. 2
T
Sol. Speed of wave in the lighter string = (50)(1) = 50 cm/s =

T
Speed of wave in the heavier string   25 cm/s
4
So wavelength in heavier string = 0.5 cm
2
   (9.5 cm)  (9.5)(2)
(1 cm)
A point that will oscillate in phase with S must be ahead in phase by (0.5)(2) with respect to Q. If
x is the distance of this point from Q then,
2
x  (0.5)(2)
0.5 cm
 x = 0.25 cm
9.5 0.25
So time required is   0.2 sec
50 25
20. 4
2L
Sol. The permitted wavelength are  =
n
h h
So, de-Broglie wavelength  d  
p 2mk n
2L h
 
n 2mk n
n2 h2
 kn  (n = 1, 2, 3, ……….)
8mL2
h2 h2
 E3  E1 = (32  12) 2
 2
 4  10 65 J
8mL mL
SECTION – A
21. A, B, C, D
Sol. Fe3  NH4 2 S 
 FeS   S 
Al3  NH4 2 S  H2O 
 Al  OH3  H2S 
Cr 3   NH4 2 S  H2O 
 Cr  OH3  H2S 
Co 2  NH4 2 S 
 CoS 
22. A, B, C, D
Sol. In linear molecule  3 translation + 2 Rotation = 5 motion
1 5
Energy contribution  5  KT  KT by one molecule
2 2
5 5
NavKT  RT by one mole.
2 2
In bent triatomic  3 translation + 3 Rotation = 6 motion
1
Energy contribution  6  KT = 3 KT by one molecule
2
By one mole = 3 KT × Nav = 3RT
In monoatomic  3 translation motion
3
Energy contribution  RT by one molecule.
2
23. B, C, D
Sol. Facts.
24. A, B, C, D
Sol. W = 1.350 gm
Molar mass = 320
1.35
Moles =
320
 1.350 1000 
calc.  CRT      0.0821 300
 320 200 
= 0.5195 atm
obs.  1.039
obs. 1.039
i 2
calc. 0.5195
i 1
 1
n1
n=2
2
Co NH3 5 Br  SO 4  Co NH3 5 Br 
    SO42
Initial 0.021
at equ.  0.021 0.021
25. D
26. C
Sol. Oxidation number Hybridization
3
[Ni(CO)4]  0 sp

 Au  CN2  +1 sp
2
PtCl4  +2 dsp2

 AuCl4  +3 dsp
2
27. B
Sol. PbBr2, AgI, AgBr and FeCl3 solution is yellow.
HgI2  Red
NI3  Touch sensitive explosive
28. A, B, C, D
Sol. All are preparation methods of Cl2.
29. A, B, C, D
Sol. Facts.
30. A, B, C, D
Sol. Facts.
SECTION – B
31. A → t; B → r; C → p; D → q
2
Sol. Ka 
C 2 C  m /  m

o
 
1  1  m / mo  
2 o2 2
C /  m C m m
  o o
o
  m
o
m m  m   m  
m
32. A → t; B → s; C → p; D → r
Sol. Co 2  KNO 2  CH3COOH  K 3 Co NO 2 6  
Yellow ppt.
2
Ni  DMG 
 Re d ppt.
Cu2  K 4 Fe  CN6  
 Cu2 Fe  CN6  
Brown ppt.
3 H2 O
Al  NH4 2 S 
 Al  OH3 
White ppt.
SECTION – C
33. 3
Sol. 
HA  
H  A

c 2
Ka 
1 
1   1
106
K a  c 2 ,    0.0316
103
m

om
m  0.0316  450  14.22
34. 9
rH2 MCnH2n  2
Sol.  5 5
rCnH2n  2 2
 MCnH2n  2  250
12n   2n  2   250
 n  18 and n / 2  9
35. 9
Sol. X3 Y6 n  m  9
36. 3
Sol. H2  2H  2e 
2
o 0.059 H 
EE  log
2 PH2
 2
0.059 H 
0.177  0  log  
2 1
0.177
 log H   3
0.059
37. 5
Sol. G  nFE
1930000
E  5.0 V
4  96500
V=5
38. 6
Sol. Cr H2O 4 Cl2  Cl  AgNO3  AgCl
20  0.03  0.1 V
20  0.03
V  6 ml
0.1
39. 6
Sol. All are correct.
40. 3
Sol. Only HgS, PbS and Cu2S gives self reduction.
SECTION – A
41. C, D
 1 1 1 1 1 1
Sol. Fix first row as [1, 1, 1], and possibility are  1 1 1 , 1 1 1
 1 1 1 1 1 1
42. A, B, C
Sol.   29
C4  29
 
C5  29
C5  29

C6  .....   29
C27  29

C28  29
C4  29
29
 3P = C4  P = 3  7  13  29
Q
CR  104 C94  Q = 104, R = 94 or 10
43. B, C
Sol. The equation can be written as t1 + t2 + t3 + t4 = 16, 0  t1  4, 0  t2  6, 0  t3  5 and 0  t4  6
Let P1 is property that t1  5, t2 is property is t2  7, p3 is property t3  6 and p4 is property that
t4  7 and Ai is denote the subset of S satisfying condition pi when S is total number of solutions
= 19C16 = 969
So, A 1  A 2  A 3  A 4  S   A i   A i  A j   A i  A j  A k  .....  k = 55
So, number of ordered pair satisfying condition abc = k4, a, b, c  I  4  225 = 900
44. A, C, D
Sol. There are maximum 7 distinct planes which are at equidistance from all the vertices
The volume of tetrahedron is 1/3 unit3
45. A, C, D
30  66  B(6, 12, 0)
Sol.  , Q  0, , 0
11  7 
PA + PB is minimum, then 12
MP AM 5 M(0, 0, 0)
So,   x-axis
PN BN 6 P N(6, 0, 0)
 30 
So, P   , 0, 0  10
 11 
 66 
Similarly Q is  0, , 0 A(0, 6, 8)
 7 
46. B, C, D
19
Sol. The possible value of k are –1,  and k = 7 is not possible, because all points will be collinear
8
47. A, B, D
Sol. (2P + I)(4P2 – 2P + I) = 8P3 + I3 = I
Similarly, (I – 2P)(I + 2P + 4P2) = I, if P has integer entries, then |I – 2P| and |I + 2P| will be equal
to either 1 or –1
48. A, C
 2  2  2   2      1
Sol. a b  b c  c  a  3  a  c b  0 , a  c  b  ac  
2
        
So, a  b  c  2 b  2 , a  2b  3c  3a  5c  19
49. B, D
Sol. 1 = |z1|2 = |z2 cos  + z3 sin |2
z 2  z 23
1  1 2 cos  sin   z22  z23  0  z3 = iz2
z 2 z3
Now take cases for z1 as z1 = –z2(cos   i sin )  z1  z2 ei

 can not equal to zero or so option A and C are not possible
2
50. B, D
Sol. Let z1, z2, z3 be complex number represents A, B, and D point
z1  z0 z3  z Q
 i (z0)O A Q(zQ)
z 2  z 0 z1  z Q
z1  z2   z1  z2  i z1  z3   z3  z1  i
 z0  ; zQ 
2 2
B M D
z2  z3
zM 
2
z0  zm  z1  z3    z1  z2  i
  i  QM  OM and OM = QM
zQ  zm  z1  z2    z3  z1  i
SECTION – B
51. (A)  (p, q), (B)  (q, s), (C)  (q), (D)  (r, s)
1
Sol. (A) 15 C2r  15 C2r 1
2
16
r  r  5 (r  N)
3
(B) Let side of triangle is (x, x, y), y < 2x
For x = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 number of possible value of y is 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 respectively
For x > 5, y has 9 possibilities so total number of the ordered pair of (x, x, y) is
1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 5  9 = 61
So, total possibility are 52  3 + 9 = 165
1 5
(C) |az2| = |–bz – c|  |b| |z| + |c|  |z|2 – |z| – 1  0, z 
2
2 2 5 1
and |c|  |a| |z| + |b| |z|  |z| + |z| – 1  0, z 
2
(D) z > x > y, z > y > x and z > y = x
So total number of cases = 8 C3  8 C3  8 C2  140
52. (A)  (p, r), (B)  (p, s), (C)  (p, r, s), (D)  (p, q, r, s, t)
a b
Sol. (A) Let the form of divisor is 2 5
So, 88  a, b  99, 12 cases for each a and b
12  12 9
So, p  E   
100  100 625
(B) On each face there are 4 such triangles are possible, so total triangles are 4  6 = 24
Total number of triangle are = 56

24 a
p E   
56 b
(C) Possible cases
1 1 1..... 1  1

10 times
8!
1 1 1..... 1 3  8
 7!
7 times
6!
1 1 1 1 3 3  15
4! 2!
4!
1 3 3 3  4
3!
So total number of cases will be = 28
(D) No such equilateral triangle is possible, so N = 0
SECTION – C
53. 7
Sol. Choices for f(1), f(2), ....., f(2018), are 4, but f(2019) have two possibility
So, ab = 2  42018
54. 8
1 1
Sol. Volume of DFAB =  height  base area =  6  4  8
3 3
Given line is perpendicular to edge AB and passing through point E
55. 3
Sol. z4 – 5z3 + 18z2 – 17z + 13 = (z – z1)(z – z2)(z – z3)(z – z4)
10 = (1 – z1)(1 – z2)(1 – z3)(1 – z4)
10 = (PA)2(PC)2  (PA)(PC) = 10
56. 2
Sol. det(A) = (r – 1)(p – 1), total number of matrices are 8,
the number of matrices has |A| = 0, are 6
57. 5
6 5 4 3
Sol. Coefficient of x in (x + x + ..... + 1)
6 6 3 –3
 Coefficient x in (x – 1) (x – 1)
 28 – 3 = 25, R = 25
58. 8
    1
Sol. 
d   abc      3
      
a  b  c  d   1 a  b  c  3 1
59. 2
2019
Sol. M  2019

C1  1008C1 
3
 2035825
60. 3
Sol. Only equality holds in A.M.  G.M. so x = y = z = 1
FIITJEE
PART TEST – III
JEE (Advanced)-2019
PAPER –2
TEST DATE: 16-12-2018
 Each Part is further divided into Two Sections: Section-A & Section-C.
Section–A (01 – 08, 21 – 28, 41 – 48) contains 24 multiple choice questions which have one or
more correct answer. Each question carries +4 marks for correct answer and –2 marks for wrong
answer.
Section–A (09 – 12, 29 – 32, 49 – 52) contains 12 paragraphs with each having 2 questions with
one or more than one correct answer. Each question carries +4 marks for correct answer and –2
marks for wrong answer.
Section–C (13 – 20, 33 – 40, 53 – 60) contains 24 Numerical based questions with answers as
negative marking.
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
1. A particle of mass m = 3kg is constrained to move along a straight A P B

line. A and B are two fixed points on the line at a separation of
L =  m. When the particle is at some point P between A and B, it is acted upon by two forces
     
F1  (200 N / m)PA and F2  (100 N / m)PB , where magnitudes of PA and PB are in metre. At
10
time t = 0, the particle is projected from A towards B with speed v = m/s. Then
3

(A) Particle reaches to B at t = sec
30

(B) Particle reaches to B at t = sec
15
200
(C) Oscillation energy of the particle is J
3
100
(D) Oscillation energy of the particle is J
3
2. In the Bohr’s hydrogen atom model, R, V and E represent the radius of the orbit, speed of the
electron and total energy of the electron respectively. Which of the following quantities are
proportional to the quantum number n?
(A) VR
(B) RE
(C) VE1
(D) RE1
3. A ray of light is incident normally on one face 30  60  90 prism
60 P
of refractive index p = 5/3 immersed in water of refractive index
m = 4/3 as shown in the figure.
5 p 1
(A) The exit angle 2 of the ray is sin1   30
8 Q
m 2
 5 
(B) The exit angle 2 of the ray is sin1  
4 3
(C) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the refractive index of water is increased to
5
n by dissolving some substance.
2 3
(D) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the refractive index of water is increased to
5
n  by dissolving some substance.
6
4. A beam of electrons striking a copper target I

produces X-rays. Its spectrum is as shown in the
figure. Keeping the voltage same if the copper target
is replaced with a different metal, the cut off
wavelength and characteristic lines of the new
spectrum will change in comparison with old as
(A) Cut off wavelength will remain unchanged. 
min
(B) Both cut off wavelength and characteristic
lines must remain unchanged.
(C) Characteristic lines may be different.
(D) Cut off wavelength will be different while
characteristic lines may remain unchanged.
5. A small hole is punched into the bottom of a rectangular boat, Water

Water
allowing water to enter the boat. As the boat sink into the water, level
level
which of the following graph best shows how the water flow rate outside
inside
through the hole varies with time? Assume that the boat remains
horizontal as it sinks.
Hole
30
litre/minute
Leak rate
20
(A) 10
0 2 4 6 8 10
t(hours)
30
litre/minute
Leak rate
20
(B) 10
0 2 4 6 8 10
t(hours)
30
litre/minute
Leak rate
20
(C) 10
0 2 4 6 8 10
t(hours)
30
litre/minute
Leak rate
20
(D) 10
0 2 4 6 8 10
t(hours)
6. A very large number of small particles forms a spherical cloud. Initially they are at rest, have
uniform mass density per unit volume 0 and occupy a region of radius r0. The cloud collapses
due to gravitation, the particles do not interact with each other in any other way. How much time
passes until the cloud collapse fully?
3
(A)
8G0

(B)
32G0
3
(C)
32G0

(D)
8G0
7. Small amplitude standing waves of wavelength  occur on a string

with tension, T, mass per unit length  and length L. One end of the 
string is fixed and the other end is attached to a ring of mass M that M
slides on a frictionless rod, as shown in the figure above. When
gravity is neglected, which of the following conditions correctly
determines the wavelength? L
 2  2L 
(A)  cot  
M    
 2  2L 
(B)  tan  
M    
2L
(C)  , n  1,2,3,............
n
2L
(D)  , n  1,2,3,............
 1
n  2 
 
8. A beam of light has a small wavelength spread  above a central

wavelength . The beam travels in vacuum until it enters a glass
 vacuum
plate at an angle  relative to the normal to the plate as shown in
the figure. The index of refraction of the glass is given by n(). The
angular spread  of the refracted beam is given by 
d( )
(A)   
d

tan  dn( )
(B)   
n d
sin  
(C)  
sin  
 
(D)  remains constant for different values of  in the range  .
6 3
Comprehension Type
This section contains 2 paragraphs each describing theory, experiment, data etc. Each question has
four options (A), (B), (C) and (D). One or more than one of these four option(s) is(are) correct
Gaseous products of burning are released into the

atmosphere of temperature Ta through a high chimney
Height of chimney
of cross section A and height h as shown in the figure.
The solid matter is burnt in the furnace which is at Chimney of cross-sectional
temperature TS. due to burning smoke (gas) generation area A
h
rate (volume per unit time) is Q. a  density of air
It can be assume that Ta  temperature of air
 the velocity of the smoke (gas) in the furnace is
negligibly small.
S  density of smoke Air vent
 the density of the smoke (gas) does not differ TS  temperature of smoke
from that air at the same temperature and
pressure.
 the gases can be treated as ideal while in
furnace.
A furnace with chimney
 the pressure of the air changes with height
according to the hydrostatic law. The change of
the density of the air with height is negligible.
 the flow of gases in the chimney follows
Bernoulli’s equation.
 the change of the density of the gas (smoke) is
negligible throughout the chimney.
9. What is the minimum height of the chimney needed in order that chimney functions efficiently, so
that it can release all of the produced smoke(gas) into the atmosphere? Express your answer in
terms of Q, A, g, Ta, a , s and T, where T = TS  Ta
s Ta Q2
(A)
gA 2 T(a  s )
Ta Q2
(B)
2gA 2 T
Q2  s
(C)
2(a  s )A 2 g
Q2 (Ta  T)
(D)
2gA 2 T
10. Assume that two chimneys are built to serve exactly the same purpose. Their cross sections are
identical, but are designed to work in different parts of the world, one in cold regions designed to
work at an average atmospheric temperature of 23C and the other in warm regions, designed
to work at an average atmospheric temperature of 27C. The temperature of the furnace is 327C.
It was calculated that the height of the chimney designed to work in cold regions is 100 m. How
high is the other chimney?
(A) 71.4m
(B) 280 m
(C) 140 m
(D) 100 m
In a hypothetical experiment light is used to levitate a z

Glass
transparent glass hemisphere with radius R and mass hemisphere
m having refractive index n. In the medium outside the
hemisphere, the index of refraction is equal to one. A R
parallel beam of monochromatic laser light is incident g n
uniformly and normally onto the central portion of its
planar surface as shown in figure. The acceleration of
gravity g is vertically downwards. The radius  of the
circular cross section of the laser beam is much smaller Laser beam
than R. Both the glass hemisphere and the laser beam
are axially symmetric with respect to z-axis.
2
The glass hemisphere does not absorb any laser light. Its surface has been coated with a thin layer of
transparent material so that reflections are negligible when light enters and leaves the glass hemisphere.
The optical path traversed by laser light passing through the non-reflecting surface layer is also negligible.
11. Find the laser power P required to balance the weight of the glass hemisphere.
2mgR2 c
(A)
(n  1)2  2
4mgR2 c
(B)
(n  1)2  2
2mgR2 c
(C)
(n2  1) 2
mgR 2c
(D)
(n2  1) 2
12. If the frequency of the laser beam is f, then the number of photons striking the hemisphere per
unit time is
2mgR2 c
(A)
(n  1)2  2hf
4mgR2 c
(B)
(n  1)2  2hf
2mgR2 c
(C)
(n2  1) 2hf
mgR2 c
(D)
(n2  1) 2hf
SECTION – C
(both inclusive).
13. A ray of light is incident parallel to BC at a height h = 3.0 cm A

from BC. Find the height (in cm) above BC at which the
emergent ray leaves the surface AC. It is given that   2
and length BC = 20 cm. Take tan 15 = 0.25.
h
45 45
B C
14. A compound microscope is used to enlarge an object kept at a distance of 3 cm from its
objective. The objective consists of several convex lenses is contact and has a focal length of 2
cm. If a lens of focal length 10 cm is removed from the objective, the eyepiece has to be moved
by x cm to refocus the image. The value of x is
15. Consider a nuclear reaction A + B  C. A nucleus A moving with kinetic energy of 5 MeV collides
with a nucleus B moving with kinetic energy of 3 MeV and forms a nucleus C in excited state.
Find the kinetic energy of nucleus C (in MeV) just after its formation if it is formed in a state with
excitation energy 10.65 MeV. Take masses of nuclei of A, B and C as 25.0, 10.0 and 34.995 amu,
1 amu  930 MeV/c2
16. A small sphere of radius R = 10 cm is arranged to pulsate so that its radius varies in simple
harmonic motion between a range 10.0cm  0.1cm with frequency f = 100 Hz. This produces
3 5
sound waves in the surrounding air of density  =1.6 kg/m and bulk modulus B = 10 Pascal.
225
Find the total acoustic power radiated by the sphere (in watt). (take 3  )
8
2
17. Fresh water flows horizontally from pipe section 1 of cross sectional Ps(P2  P1) (KN/m )
area A1 into pipe section 2 of cross-sectional area A2. Figure gives
a plot of the pressure difference (P2  P1) versus the inverse area
squared A12 that would be expected for a volume flow rate of a
certain value if the waver flow were laminar under all
circumstances. The scale on the vertical axis is set by PS = 100 16 32 A 2 (m4 )
1
KN/m2. For the condition of the figure, what is the volume flow rate
in m3/s? (take 6  2.4 )
18. A plano-convex lens is placed on a plane glass surface. A thin film of air is formed between the
curved surface of the lens and the plane glass plate. The thickness of the air film is zero at the
point of contact and increases as one moves away from the point of contact. In the arrangement
light containing two wavelengths 4000 Å and 4002 Å is allowed to fall normally on the flat face of
the lens. Calculate the minimum distance (in cm) from the point of contact at which the rings will
disappear. Assume that the radius of curvature of the curved surface is 400 cm. (assume
identical intensities for both wavelengths)
19. An optical fiber consists of a cylindrical core of radius R, made of transparent material with
refraction index varying gradually from the value n = n1 on the axis to n = n2 (with 1 < n2 < n1) at a
distance R from the axis, according to the formula
n  n  x   n1 1  2 x2
x x
n0 = 1
n2 n0 = 1 n2
R n1 R n1
O z i O z
Where x is the distance from the core axis and  is a constant. The core is surrounded by a
cladding made of a material with constant refraction index n2. Outside the fibre is air of refractive
index n0. Let Oz be the axis of the fiber, with O – the centre of the fiber end. Given n0 = 1, n1 = 1.5
and n2 = 1.46, R = 25 m. A monochromatic light ray enters the fiber at point O under an incident
angle i = 30, the incident plane being the plane xOz. At each point on the trajectory of the light
in the fiber, the refractive index n and the angle  between the light ray and the Oz axis satisfy the
relationship ncos   C . Find C.
20. Two thin lenses with lens powers D1 and D2 diopter are located at distance L = 25 cm from each
other and their optical axes coincide. This system creates an erect real image of the object,
located at the optical axis closer to lens D1 with the net magnification M1 = 1. If the position of the
two tenses are exchanged, the system again produces an erect real image with the net
magnification M2 = 4. What is the difference between lens powers D = D1 – D2 (in diopter)?
SECTION – A

(A) AgBr shows both Frenkel and Schottky defect.
(B) When crystals of NaCl are heated in an atmosphere of Na vapours. Crystal shows yellow
colour due to metal excess defect.
(C) ZnO on heating turns yellow this is because of metal excess defect due to the presence
of extra cations at interstitial sites.
(D) Schottky defect is shown by ionic compounds in which cation and anion are of almost
similar sizes.

(A) Melting point order: PH3 < AsH3 < SbH3 < NH3
(B) Boiling point order: PH3 < AsH3 < NH3 < SbH3
(C) NCl3 on hydrolysis give HOCl while PCl3 gives HCl
(D) Melting point order: HCl < HBr < HF < HI
23. Molarity of solution, prepared by mixing CaO in 200 ml water. The CaO is obtained by heating
100 gm of limestone which was 80% pure?
(A) 5
(B) 4
(C) 3
(D) 2

(A) Fe3+ ion forms a charge transfer complex with SCN ions.
(B) When KCN is added to CuSO4 solution, KCN acts as a reducing agent as well as a
complexing agent.
(C) ZnO is reduced to Zn by H2.

(D) In Baeyer’s process Al2O3 goes in to Al  OH 4 while other basic oxides remains insoluble.
25. Correct order among the following is/are?

(A) HF > HCl > HBr > HI (Dipole moment)
(B) HOCl < HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4 (Acidic strength)
(C) H2S < H2Se < H2Te < H2O (Boiling point)
(D) NH3 > PH3 > AsH3 > SbH3 (Bond angle)
26. The Eo value of the following reaction are given

Sn2   Sn4   2e  Eo  0.15 V
Fe  Fe2   2e Eo  0.44 V
Fe 2  Fe3   e  E o  0.771 V
Fe  Fe3   3e Eo  0.036 V
MnO 4  8H  5e  Mn2   4H2 O Eo  1.51 V
Under standard condition which of the following reaction is spontaneous?
H 
(A) Fe  MnO 4  Fe2   Mn2   H2 O
H 
(B) Fe2  MnO 4  Fe3   Mn2   H2 O
H 
(C) Fe  MnO 4  Fe3   Mn2   H2 O
(D) Fe2  Sn4   Fe3   Sn2 
27. When one mole of triatomic (bent) ideal gas at 300 K undergoes reversible adiabatic change
under a constant external pressure of 1 atm from 1 lit volume to 27 litre. What would be the final
2
temperature (in Kelvin)? [  = 1 + : where f is degree of freedom].
f
(A) 100
(B) 80.27
(C) 11.11
(D) 33.33
28. 1 mole of an ideal gas at 300 K expands isothermally and reversibly ten times of its initial volume.
Energy used in non useful work is
(A) 5.744 kJ/mol
(B) 0.0191 kJ/mol
(C) 2.303 nRT log V2/V1
(D) 2.303 nR log V2/V1
Comprehension Type

Mn  NO3 2   A  s   B  g 
Brown 
Conc. H2 SO4  A  D  aq.  E  g   H2O
E
D  NaOH  F   Brown 
White ppt.
29. D  PbO2  Conc. HNO3  Y

Purple 
Y is:
(A) H2MnO4
(B) HMnO4
(C) Pb3O4
(D) Mn(NO3)2
30. Which of the following is/are correct?

(A) D  NaBiO3  dil. HNO3  Purple colour
H 
(B) D  IO 4  H2 O  Purple colour
(C) B  FeSO 4  Brown ring
Excess
Starch paper
(D) B  KI   Blue spot
Resonance energy of A molecule is equal to the difference between potential energy of most stable
resonating structure and the hybrid (actual) structure. More the magnitude of resonance energy, more will
be the stability of the molecule.
31. Calculate the magnitude of resonance energy of benzene
Given : HHydrogenation of = - 28.6 kcal/mole
HHydrogenation of = - 49.8 kcal/mole
(A) 35
(B) 36
(C) 70
(D) 72
32. Which of the following statement is/are correct?

Given: Hhydrogenation of benzene  49.8 kcal / mole
Hhydrogenation of naphthalene  82 kcal / mole
Hhydrogenation of  28.6 kcal / mole
(A) Magnitude of resonance energy of naphthalene is = 61 k cal/mole

(B) Thermodynamically benzene is more stable than naphthalene
(C) Thermodynamically naphthalene is more stable than benzene
(D) Magnitude of resonance energy of naphthalene is 72 kcal/mole
SECTION – C
(both inclusive).
33. Oxidation number of Cr in K3CrO8 is:
34. Coordination number of cation present in a void when r  / r  lies in between 0.155 to 0.225.
35. A 6 ampere current is passed through a solution of CuSO4 for 59 minutes. The amount of
Cu (in grams) deposited at cathode is:
36. What is the normality of 28 V H2O2 solution ?
37. What is the percentage of SO3 by mass in 101.8% oleum?
38. The n-factor of Br2 in following reaction is x

hot
Br2  KOH   Br   BrO3
Than 3x = y : value of y is:
39. At 90oC vapour pressure of pure liquid A is 500 mm Hg and that of pure liquid B is 900 mm Hg. If
o
a mixture of solution of A and B boils at 90 C and 1 atm pressure mole fraction of A is XA:
XA × 20 = n, value of n is
40. Mixture of Fe2O3 and Al is used in solid fuel rocket. What is the fuel value (magnitude only) per ml
of mix (in Kcal/ml).
Given: HAl2 O3  399.0 Kcal / mol, HFe2 O3  199.0 Kcal / mol
Density of Fe2O3 and Al are 5 gm/ml and 3 gm/ml respectively.
SECTION – A
 1
41. Let Un be the set of the nth roots of unity. If A        , then which of following is/are
Un
correct?
(A) A = 0, if n = 4k, k  N
(B) A = –4, if n = 4k + 2, k  N
(C) A = 2 if n = 4k + 1, k  N
(D) A = 2, if n = 4k + 3, k  N
1 , i j 1

42. Let Rn  bij be a determinant such that bij  3 , i  j  0 , then n  N
nn
0 , otherwise

(A) R2019 + R2017 = 3R2018
(B) R2019 + R2017 = 9R2018
(C) The value of R4 is 54
(D) R5 is multiple of 9
43. If P and Q are two 3  3 non-identity matrices with real entries such that PPT = I, QQT = I (PT, QT
are transpose of matrices P and Q respectively) and det(PQ) < 0, then which of the following
is/are always correct (where det stands for determinant of a matrix)
(A) det(P + Q) < 0
(B) det(P + Q) = 0
(C) atleast one of the det(P – I) or det(Q – I) will be zero
(D) det(P–1 + Q–1) = det(P + Q)
 z  1   z  1 2
44. Given in the Argand plane two curves C1 : arg     and C2 : arg   where
 z  1 3  z  1 3
z = x + iy, x, y  R, then
4 2
(A) sum of areas enclosed by the real axis and C1, and the real axis and C2 is equal to
3
(B) the number of complex numbers satisfying curve C1 and C2 simultaneously, is zero
1
(C) if  moves on curve C2, then  ||< 1, where || is modulus of 
3
(D) if  moves on curve C1, then || can be 1 unit, where || is modulus of 
45. There are 6 red balls and 8 green balls in a bag, five balls are drawn out at random and placed in
a red box and the remaining 9 balls are put in a green box. If the number of red balls in the green
box is Rg and the number of green balls in the red box is Gr, then which of the following is/are
INCORRECT?
788
(A) probability that Rg + Gr is a prime number is
1001
213
(B) probability that Rg + Gr is a prime number is
1001
708
(C) probability that Rg + Gr is an even number is
1001
213
(D) probability that Rg + Gr is an odd number is
1001
46. A five digit number a1a2a3a4a5 is said to satisfy property P if ai  {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7}  1  i  5,

and let k = a1 + a2 + a3 + a4 + a5, then
 75  1 
(A) number of five digit numbers satisfying P such that k is divisible by 3 is  
 3 
 75  1 
(B) number of five digit numbers satisfying P such that k is divisible by 2 is  
 2 
 75  3 
(C) number of five digit numbers satisfying P such that k is divisible by 4 is  
 4 
(D) number of five digit numbers satisfying P such that that k = 33, is less than 20
47. An urn contains  white balls (  3) and r red balls. If 3 balls were to the drawn without
replacement, the probability that they would all be white is P. Introducing an extra white ball in the
4P
urn changed this probability to , then
3
(A) the maximum value of r can be 108
(B) the maximum value of r can be 88
(C)  can be 6
(D)  can be 9
48. Object A and B start moving simultaneously in the coordinate plane via a sequence of steps.
each of length one with the same speed, object A starts at (0, 0) and each of its step is either
right or up, both equally likely object B starts at (3, 5) and each of its steps is either left or down
both equally likely, then which of the following is/are true
5
(A) the probability that object A and B meets is
32
25
(B) the probability that object A and B will not meet is
32
7
(C) the probability that A and B meet at point (a, b), such that a < b is
64
3
(D) the probability that A and meet at point (a, b) where a = b is
32
Comprehension Type
 x 0 0
Let A  0 y 0  ; x, y, z  I with the condition that det(adj(adj A)) = 212  38  54, S1 is set of all the
0 0 z 
matrices A, S2 is set of all such matrices A where trace of A is divisible by 2, and x, y, z  N and S3 is set
of all such matrices A, where (trace A3) – 3 det A = 0, and x, y, z  N. Let the number of elements in set
S1, S2 and S3 be 2,  and  respectively.

49. Then is divisible by

(A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 5 (D) 7
50. Which of the following is/are correct?

 
(A)  10 (B)  15
 
 
(C) 9 (D)  14
 
Consider a tetrahedron Die that has four integers 1, 2, 3 and 4 written on its faces. Roll the Die 2000
times and for each i, 1  i  4 let f(i) represent the number of times i is written on the bottom face.
Let A denote total sum of the numbers on the bottom face for these 2000 rolls, it A4 = 6144 f(1) f(2) f(3)
f(4), then
f 1  f  2 
51. The value of is equal to
f  4
f  2
(A)
f  4
f 2
(B)
f 3 
f 1
(C)
f 2
(D) none of these
52. Let g(x) is a polynomial equation such that, g(x) = 0, has all real roots, where
4 3 2
let g(x) = x + (f(1) – d)x + (f(2) – c)x + (f(3) – b)x + (f(4) – a), a, b, c, d  R |g(–i)| = 1, where
i  1 , then which of the following is/are INCORRECT?
(A) g(5) > 4
(B) g(5) = 2000
(C) c+d<a+b
(D) g(4) > f(4)
SECTION – C
(both inclusive).
4 1  a a3 
53. Let A   and A100   1 , then value of a1 + a4 is equal to _____

 9 2  a 2 a4 
7 2 x 2  12
54. Let f  x   6 x 2  12 3 , then the number of real roots of f(x) = 0 is equal to _____
2
x  12 2 7
2 2 2 3 3 3 1  a 1  b 1  c 
55. For real a, b, c; a + b + c = 2, a + b + c = 6 and a + b + c = 8, then is
5
equal to _____
2 2 20
 1  1 1
56. If Rn  1   1    1   1   , where n  1, then
 n  n
R is equal to _____
n 1 n
57. The radius of circumscribing sphere of a regular tetrahedron the coordinates of whose vertices
are A(0, 0, 0), B(3, 0, 0), C(0, 3, 0), D(0, 0, 3) is R, then [R], is equal to _____ (where [.] denotes
the greatest integer function)
x 1 y  2 z  2
58. A variable line passing through the point of intersection of the lines  
7 1 5
and x + 3 = y – 4 = –z. If S(x, y, z) = 0 is the locus of mirror image of the point (8, 3, –7) in the
variable line and S(x, y, z) = 0 is locus of foot of the perpendicular from (8, 3, –7) to the variable
line, then the ratio of volumes of S to S is equal to _____
a1 a2 a3 
59. Let P  a4 a5 a6  , where ai  {0, 1, 2}  i  {1, 2, 3, ....., 9}. If possible values of det(P) are
a7 a8 a9 
P1, P2, P3, ....., Pn, then P1 + P2 + P3 + ..... + Pn is equal to _____
60. Let R be the number of non-empty subsets of the set {1, 2, 3, ....., 9) satisfying the property that
no two consecutive numbers are elements of a set, then number of prime divisors of R
is/are_____
FIITJEE
PART TEST – III
JEE (Advanced)-2019
PAPER –2
TEST DATE: 16-12-2018
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
1. B, C
   
Sol. ma  200x  100(L  x)
300  1
 a  x 
3  3
So,  = 10 rad/s
10 1
For amplitude,  10 A 2 
3 9
2
 A m
3
T T T 2
So, t AB    , where T  sec
12 4 3 10
1  4  200
and Eosc  (3)(100)    J
2 9 3
2. A, C
n2 Z Z2
Sol. From Bohr’s theory, R  , V and E  2
z n n
3. A, C
Sol. 1 sin 1 = 2 sin 2

60
5 4
sin30  sin 2 60
3 3 60
30
5 1
 2 = sin1   30
8
2
for total internal reflection at P, we use
5
sin60  n
3
5
n
2 3
4. A, C
Sol. Cut off wavelength depends upon the accelerating potential difference so it will remain same and
characteristic lines are dependent upon the energy gap between the energy levels of the
elements. So these may change.
5. A
Sol. Difference in the outer and inner water levels always remains the same. Then the pressure
difference across the hole remains same.
6. C
3
42  r0 
Sol. From Kepler’s law, T 2   
4 2
G r03  
3
7. B
Sol. consider the case for M  0 and M  
8. B
Sol. (1) sin  = n() sin 
dn() d
So, 0 = sin  n( )cos 
d d
sin  1 dn( )
 d   d
cos  n( ) d
tan  dn( )
    
n( ) d
9. B, C
10. C
Sol. (for Q. 9-10)
Applying Bernoulli’s theorem between top and bottom of chimney
1
P  s gh  s v 2  P0 , where v = Q/A
2
1 Q2
So, P  P0  s gh  s 2  P0  a gh
2 A
2
sQ
So, h 
2(a  s )A 2 g
a Ts Ta Q2
For ideal gas,  , So h =
s Ta 2gA 2 T
hW (273  27) (327  23)

 , where hC = 100 m
hC (327  27) (273  23)
So, hw = 140 m
11. B
12. B
Sol. (for Q. 11 to 12)
B
For small , n = 
So,  = (n 1)  
Initial photon momentum per unit time = P/c
Final photon momentum per unit time A
P 2rdr 2P  2  
 2 cos   2   1   rdr
 c c  2 

2P  (n  1)r 2  r  C
= 1   rdr , Because   
c 2 0  2R2  R n 1
P  (n  1)2 
 1  
c 4R2 
mg4R2 c
So, P 
(n  1)2  2
P
No. of photons/time =
hf
SECTION – C
13. 1
Sol. sin 45 =  sin r  r = 30 A
From BQR and CSR
BQ BR 
 45 45
SC RC Q S
P i T
 RC  h 45 i i i 45
 h  3   C
 BR  B M R
i = 45+ r = 75
QM
So,  tan15 , so MR = 12 cm
MR
So, BR = 15 cm and RC = 5 cm
So, h = 1cm
14. 9
1 1 1
Sol. In Ist case:    v 1 = 6 cm
v1 3 2
When one lens is removed, the new focal length of the objective is
1 1 1 1 1
     f = 2.5 cm
f  f f1 2 10
The new position of image is
1 1 1
 
v 2 3 2.5
 v2 = 15 cm
So, shifting = 15  6 = 9 cm
15. 2
Sol. m A c 2  K A  mB c 2  K B  mCc 2  K C  excitation energy
So, K C  2 MeV
16. 9
B
2 2 2
Sol. Intensity at the surface of sphere = 2 f (R) 
B
So, total power = 2 2 f 2 ( R)2  4 R 2

= 8 3 Bf 2R2 ( R)2  9 Watt.
17. 6
1 1  A2 V2 
Sol. P2  P 1 =
2
 
 V12  V22    2 2 2  V22 
2  A1 

1 2 1
 V22 A 22  A1   V22
2 2
From the graph,
1 2 2 300  103 1
V2 A 2  N/m2 and V22  300  103 N/m2
2 16 2
1
So, A 2  m2 and V2  600 m/s
4
So, volume rate Q = A2V2 = 6 m3/s
18. 4
rm2
Sol. For newton’s ring, t 
2R R
For fringe system to disappear completely
 1
2t  m 1   m    2
 2 t
2t 2t 1 rm
So,  
1  2 2
 2  1 1
So, 2t 
12 2
rm2 2  107 1
So, 2 14

2R 16  10 2
 rm = 4  102 m
19. 2
Sol. Refraction at the air and core (at x = 0) interface gives
(1) sin i = n1 sin r
Now for refraction at various parallel interfaces at different x.
 
n1 cos r = n1 sin     = n cos 
2 
sin2 
So, n cos  = n1 1 
n12
9 1
 n12  sin2 i =    2
4 4
20. 3
Sol. Both the lenses must be converging
If x is the distance of object from the first lens
f
So, m1  1 where f 1 is focal length of first lens
f1  x
f2
and m2  where f 2 is focal length of the second lens and L is separation between
 xf1 
f2   L  
 f1  x 
the lenses.
 xf1 
f2   L  
 1 f x  x  f1  L x  f1  f2  L 
So,   1 = 1 
M1 m1m2 f1 f2 f2 f1f2
When the lenses are interchanged, in the above expression only the second term changes
1 L x  f1  f2  L 
So,  1 
M2 f1 f1f2
1 1 1 1
   L     L  D1  D2 
M1 M2  f1 f2 
1 1
So, 1 – = (D1 – D2)
4 4
 D1 – D2 = 3 diopter
SECTION – A
21. A, B, C, D
Sol. Facts.
22. A, B, C, D
Sol. Facts.
23. B

Sol. CaCO3   CaO  CO2
100 gm sample contains 80 gm CaCO3
80
 Moles of CaCO3   0.8
100
 Moles of CaO formed = 0.8 mole
0.8
Molarity   1000  4.0
200
24. A, B, D
25. A, B, C, D
26. A, B, C
Sol. For feasibility of reaction Eo   ve & Go   ve
[Fe  Fe2   2e  ]5
[MnO 4  5e  8H  Mn2   4H2O]  2
5Fe  2MnO4  8H  2Mn2   5Fe2   8H2 O
G1o  2  F  0.44
Go2  5  F  1.51
Go3  10  FEo  5G1o  2Go2
Eo  0.44  1.51  1.95
Fe  Fe3   3e

MnO 4  5e   8H  Mn2   8H2O
Eo  0.036  1.51  1.546
Fe 2  Fe3   e 
MnO 4  5e   8H  Mn2   8H2O
5Fe2   MnO4  8H  Mn2   8H2O  Fe3 
Eo   0.771  1.51 = 0.739
Fe 2  Fe3   e  Eo  0.771

Sn4   2e 
 Sn2  Eo  0.15
2Fe2   Sn4   2Fe3   Sn2 
Eo   0.15    0.771  0.621
27. A
Sol. T1V11  T2 V2  1
8/6
2/6
T1 1 T1 300
T2  2/ 6
   100
 27  3 3
28. A, C
Sol. G  H  TS
V2
TS  2.303nRT log
V1
10
 2.303  1 8.314  300log
1
= 5744.14 J mol-1 K-1
29. B
30. A, B, C, D
Sol. (for Q. 29 to 30)

Mn  NO3 2   MnO2  2NO2
MnO2  Conc. H2 SO4 
 MnSO 4  O2  H2 O
O
MnSO 4  NaOH  Mn  OH2 
2
 MnO  OH 2
 White  Brown

H
PbO2  MnSO 4  HMnO 4  Pb2 
Purple
H 
Mn2   NaBiO3  HMnO 4  Bi3 
H 
Mn2   IO 4  HMnO 4  IO3
Starch
NO2  KI 
Paper  Blue spot
31. B
Sol.  H2  H  28.6 kcal / mole
 3H2  H   28.6   3 kcal / mole
Non resonating
 3H2  H  49.8 kcal / mole
Benzene
 resonanceH   85.8    49.8   36 kcal / mole
32. A, B
Sol.
 5H2  H  5   28.6   143 kcal / mole
Stable resonating structure
Naphthalene  5H2  H  82 kcal / mole
  resonance Hnaphthalene   143    82   61

Resonance energy of benzene = - 36
One naphthalene ring equivalent to two benzene ring
 Magnitude of resonance energy of naphthalene (-61), is less than two benzene ring (-72).
So benzene ring is more stable.
SECTION – C
33. 5
Sol. O O O
Cr O
O
O
O O
34. 3
r
Sol.  0.155  0.225, trigonal planar.
r
35. 7
63.5
Sol. W  zit   6  59  60
2  96500
= 7 gm
36. 5
28
Sol. N 5
5.6
37. 8
101.8  100
Sol. %SO3   80  8
18
38. 5
5
Sol. x
3
5
y  5  5
3
39. 7
Sol. 760  poA X A  pBo XB
760  500X A  900 1  X A 
XA = 0. 35
 n  0.35  20  7
40. 4
3
Sol. 2Al  O2  Al2 O3 H  399.0 kcal
2
3
2Fe  O2  Fe2O3 H  199.0 kcal
2
By using these. We get
2Al  Fe2 O3  Al2O3  2Fe H  200 kcal
54 160
Vol. of fusion mixture = vol. of Al + vol. of Fe2O3    50 ml
3 5
200
 Fuel value   4 kcal / ml
50
SECTION – A
41. A, B, C, D
Sol. Let f  x   xn  1   x  
Un
1 2  1
    i   i  i  1 i  1
n n
 Un
A         =
Un    Un    1n1
Un
42. A, D
3 1 0 0 ... 1 1 00...
3 1 0...
1 3 10 0... 0 3
1
Sol. Rn  0 1  Rn  3 0 1
0
. 0 . 0
. n 1n1
. . nn
. .  n1n 1
 Rn = 3Rn – 1 – Rn – 2
 Rn + Rn – 2 = 3Rn – 1
43. B, C, D
T T
Sol. P T  P  Q  Q T   P  Q   |P + Q| = 0, P T  P  I    P  I
Either |P| |P – I| = –|P – I| or |Q||Q – I| = –|Q – I|, because |P| |Q| < 0
 
P P1  Q1 Q  P  Q  P1  Q 1   P  Q  0
44. B, C
Sol. Shown in the figure
Im
C2  R e, C 1  , ||  1
–1 1 –1 1
45. B, C, D
5 balls 9 balls
Rg green 8  Rg green
Sol.
5  Rg red Rg  1 red
Re d box Green box
So, Gr = Rg + 1
Rg + Gr = 2Rg + 1 (cannot be even number)
1  2Rg + 1  11
6
C5  8 C4  6 C1 213
For Rg + Gr non-prime  Rg = 0 or 4  so the probability = 14

C5 1001
46. A, B, C, D
Sol. The each number a1a2 ..... a5 will correspond to a term in expansion
a 1
1    
 a12  .....  a17 a12  a22  .....  a72 a13  .....  a73 ..... a15  a52  .....  a75 
5
So find sum of coefficient of x , x , x
3k 2k 4k

in expansion of  x1  .....  x 7  , for the A, B, C
5
respectively (where k  N), if k = 33 then number possible case will be 5 + C2 = 15
47. B, D
 1
C3 4 C3
Sol. P  r
, P  r 1
C3 3 C3
2    2
Equality value of P, r 
  11
108
r    10 
11  
rmax = 88,  can not 6 as r will not be integer
48. B, C, D
Sol. There are 8 steps between (0, 0) and (3, 5) so A and B can be meet at (0, 4), (1, 3), (2, 2) and
(3, 1) point
Let ai and bi denote the number of paths to Pi from (0, 0) to (3, 5) respectively, because A has to
take r steps to right and B has to take r + 1 steps down the number of ways A and B can meet at
Pi is
ai · bi = 4Ci · 4Ci + 1, because A and B can each take 24 path in 4 ways, so probability they will meet
1 3
is 8  aibi
2 i0
49. A, C
50. C, D
Sol. xyz = (23  32  5), number of possible triplet of (x, y, z) are = 5C2  4C2  3C2 = 180
so 2 = 8  180 = 1440, if x + y + z = even so possible cases are odd + odd + even,
even + even + even
For odd + odd + even, total number of cases = 54
For even + even + even, total number of cases = 18, so  = 72
Trace of A3 = x3 + y3 + z3, x3 + y3 + z3 = 3xyz  Either x = y = z or x + y + z = 0 , so  = 0
51. A, C
Sol. f(1) + f(2) + f(3) + f(4) = 2000, By A.M.  G.M., A4  6144 f(1) f(2) f(3) f(4)
Only equality holds true so f(1) = 2f(2) = 3f(3) = 4f(4)
so f(1) = 960, f(2) = 480, f(3) = 320, f(4) = 240
52. B, C, D
Sol. Let g(x) = (x – )(x – )(x – )(x – ), , , ,  are the roots of polynomial g(x) = 0
1  1   2 1  2 1  y 2 1   2   =  =  =  = 0
4
So, g(x) = x and f(1) = d, f(2) = c, f(3) = b, f(4) = a
SECTION – C
53. 2
3 1  0 0 
Sol. A = B + I, B    , B2   
 9 3  0 0 
54. 4
Sol. f(x) = 0, has five distinct and real roots
55. 0
Sol.  a  2 ,  ab  1 , abc = –2
So, a, b, c are roots and equation x3 – 2x2 – x + 2
 (a, b, c) = (1, –1, 2)
56. 7
1 1
  n2   n  1  n2   n  1  , find R1, R2, ....., R20 it will be a telescopic sum
2 2
Sol.
Rn 4  
57. 2
Sol. Form a cube of edge length 3, R 

length of body diagonal   3 3
2 2
58. 8
x 1 y  2 z  2
Sol. Point Q(8, 3, –7) lies on the line   , let P is point of intersection of the given
7 1 5
lines P(–6, 1, 3)
S is sphere with radius PQ and S is sphere with diameter PQ
59. 0
Sol. If possible value the value of det P is k, then –k al also possible for each positive k
60. 2
Sol. Let an is total of such subset for a n number of element set . So in that subset let either 1, is
appeared or not, if 1 appeared then total number of subset will be an – 2, if 1 is not appeared total
number of subset is an – 1,
so an = an – 1 + an – 2 provide a1 = 1, a2 = 2 find a9 = 55
OPEN TEST
ALL INDIA INTEGRATED TEST SERIES
Paper 1

t h e t es t .
INSTRUCTIONS
4. Each part is further divided into Two sections: Section-A & Section-C

on OMR sheet.

1. Section-A (01– 07, 19 – 25, 37 - 43) contains 21 multiple choice questions which have one or
more than one correct answer. Each question carries +4 marks for correct answer and –2
marks for wrong answer
Section-A (08 – 13, 26 – 31, 44 - 49) contains 18 questions. Each of 2 Tables with 3 Columns
and 4 Rows has three questions. Column 1 will be with 4 rows designated (I), (II), (III) and (IV).
Column 2 will be with 4 rows designated (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv). Column 3 will be with 4 rows
designated (P), (Q), (R) and (S).
2. Section-C (14 – 18, 32 – 36, 50 - 54) contains 15 Numerical based questions with answer as
negative marking.
Enrolment No.
AIITS-OT (Paper-1)-PCM-JEE(Advanced)/19 2
Useful Data
PHYSICS
Acceleration due to gravity g = 10 m/s2

2 2
Permittivity of free space 0 = 8.85  1012 C /N-m
3 3
Density of water water = 10 kg/m
CHEMISTRY

= 0.0821 Lit atm K1 mol1
= 1.987  2 Cal K1 mol1
= 6.625  10–27 ergs
1 amu = 1.66  10–27 kg
1 eV = 1.6  10–19 J

N=9, Na=11, Mg=12, Si=14, Al=13, P=15, S=16,
Cl=17, Ar=18, K =19, Ca=20, Cr=24, Mn=25,
Fe=26, Co=27, Ni=28, Cu = 29, Zn=30, As=33,
Br=35, Ag=47, Sn=50, I=53, Xe=54, Ba=56,
Pb=82, U=92.
F=19, Na=23, Mg=24, Al = 27, Si=28, P=31, S=32,
Cl=35.5, K=39, Ca=40, Cr=52, Mn=55, Fe=56, Co=59,
Ni=58.7, Cu=63.5, Zn=65.4, As=75, Br=80, Ag=108,
Sn=118.7, I=127, Xe=131, Ba=137, Pb=207, U=238.
3 AIITS-OT (Paper-1)-PCM-JEE(Advanced)/19
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
1. In the isothermal expansion of an ideal gas:

(A) there is no change in the temperature of the gas
(B) there is no change in the internal energy of the gas
(C) the work done by the gas is equal to the heat supplied to the gas
(D) the work done by the gas is equal to the change in its internal energy.
2. A particle of mass m is attached to one end of the light inextensible

string and other end of the string is fixed in vertical plane as shown.
5
Now particle is given horizontal velocity u  gl , then which of the l
2
following statement/s is/are correct.
u
(A) The string makes angle with the downward vertical is 600 when acceleration of the
particle is horizontal.
(B) The tension in string is 2 mg when acceleration of the particle is horizontal.
3
(C) The speed of the particle is gl when acceleration of the particle is horizontal
2
(D) The particle will not complete the circle.
3. A small block is connected to one end of a

massless spring of un-stretched length 4.9
m. The other end of the spring (see the
figure) is fixed. The system lies on a
horizontal frictionless surface. The block is
stretched by 0.2 m and released from rest at
t = 0. It then executes simple harmonic

motion with angular frequency   rad / s .
3
Simultaneously at t = 0, a small pebble is projected with speed  from point P at an
angle of 45° as shown in the figure. Point P is at a horizontal distance of 10 m fro O. If
the pebble hits the block at t = 1s, the value of  is (take g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 50 m / s (B) 51 m / s
(C) 52 m / s (D) 53 m / s
4. A cyclic process ABCA shown in V-T diagram is performed with a B C

constant mass on an ideal gas. The same process on a PV diagram V
A
is represented as
T
(A) A C (B) B C
P
P
B A
V V
(C) B C (D) B
P P
A A C
V V
5. A block of mass 1 kg moves under the influence of external forces on a rough horizontal
surface. At some instant, it has a speed of 1 m/s due east and an acceleration of 1 m/s2
due north. The force of friction acting on it is F
(A) F acts due west
(B) F acts due south
(C) F acts in the south west direction
(D) the magnitude of F cannot be found from the given data
6. A smooth massless wedge is pushed by a horizontal force m

F. When F
(A) F  0,N  mgcos ;N  normal reaction received by the
block

(B) F  0,N  mgcos 
(C) a  0,N  mgcos ;a  acceleration of the wedge
mg
(D) F  mg tan ,N 
cos 
7. Block A is placed on an inclined plane B making an angle of 30º with

horizontal. R2 is the reaction on A when B is stationary. R1 is the
reaction on A when B is moving with constant acceleration:
(A) If R1 / R2  4 / 3 , then block B moves with acceleration g / 3
(B) If R1 / R2  4 / 3 , then block B moves with acceleration g / 2
(C) If R1 / R2  4 / 3 , then block B remains stationary relative to block A
(D) If R1 / R2  4 / 3 , then block B will not be stationary relative to block A

Answer questions 8, 9 and 10 by appropriately matching the information given in the three
Consider a particle in space which is near Earth.

(I) A particle is thrown with velocity V (i) Path is parabola (P) Total energy is
which is less than V0. positive
(II) A particle is thrown with speed V which (ii) Path is circular (Q) Total energy is zero
is equal to V0
(III) A particle is thrown with speed V which (iii) Path is ellipse (R) Total energy is
is more than V0 but less than Ve negative
(IV) A particle is thrown with speed V = Ve (iv) Path is hyperbola (S) Total energy can be
positive or negative
V0 = orbital speed
Ve = escape speed
8. Combination that will match with bounded system will be

(A) (III) (iii) (R) (B) (I) (i) (P)
(C) (II) (iv) (P) (D) (IV) (ii) (R)
9. Combination that will match with unbounded system

(A) (IV) (i) (R) (B) (II) (iii) (R)
(C) (IV) (i) (Q) (D) (I) (i) (P)
10. For moon Earth system (assumed orbital velocity)

(A) (II) (iii) (S) (B) (II) (ii) (P)
(C) (II) (ii) (R) (D) (II) (iv) (P)
Answer questions 11, 12 and 13 by appropriately matching the information given in the
three columns of the following table.
A thin uniform rod of mass ‘m’ and length ‘’ is free to rotate about its upper end. When it is at
rest, it receives an impulse J at its lowest point, normal to its length. Immediately, after impact.
(I) Angular velocity of rod 3J2 (P) Linear momentum is conserved
(i)
2m
(II) Angular momentum of rod 3J (Q) Moment of inertia of Rod about COM
(ii)
2m m 2
is
3
(III) Kinetic energy of rod 3J (R) Angular momentum about COM is
(iii) conserved
m
(IV) Linear velocity of the mid (iv) J (S) Angular momentum about hinge is
point of rod conserved
11. Correct combination for angular velocity of the rod will be

(A) (I) (iii) (S) (B) (I) (ii) (Q)
(C) (I) (iii) (R) (D) (I) (ii) (P)
12. Correct combination for angular momentum of rod will be

(A) (II) (iv) (P) (B) (II) (ii) (Q)
(C) (II) (iii) (S) (D) (II) (i) (R)
13. Correct combination for linear velocity of mid point will be

(A) (IV) (ii) (S) (B) (IV) (ii) (Q)
(C) (IV) (iii) (P) (D) (IV) (ii) (R)
SECTION – C
14. A piece of ice (heat capacity = 2100 J kg–1 0C–1 and latent heat = 3.36 x 105 J kg–1) of
mass m grams is at -50C at atmospheric pressure. It is given 420 J of heat so that the ice
starts melting. Finally when the ice-water mixture is in equilibrium, it is found that 1 gm of
ice has melted. Assuming there is no other heat exchange in the process, the value of m
is
15. There is a quarter cylindrical wall at one portion of a

container as shown in the diagram. A force F is applied to
avoid quarter cylindrical portion from rotating the value of F F
will be (In Newton)
h=1m R
h
R=1m Hinged
 = 103 kg m–3
depth = 1 m
6
16. Gravitational acceleration on the surface of a planet is g , where g is the gravitational
11
2
acceleration on the surface of the earth. The average mass density of the planet is
3
times that of the earth. If the escape speed on the surface of the earth is taken to be
11 kms-1, the escape speed on the surface of the planet in kms-1 will be
17. Find the mass of the hanging block in kg, which

will prevent the smaller block from slipping over
the triangular block. All the surfaces are friction
less and the strings and pulleys are light. (Given m m
= M = 1 kg, cot = 2)
M
18. A system of two identical rods (L shaped) of mass m, length L. P

System rest on a peg p as shown in the figure. Period of oscillations 0
90
n 2L
T  2 then n = ?
3g
SECTION – A
19. 10 g of Ne initially at a pressure of 506.625 KPa and temperature of 473 K expand

adiabatically against a constant external pressure of 202.65 KPa than
(A) Ssys = +ve (B) Stotal = Ssurr
(C) Stotal = +ve (D) Ssurr = 0
20. Which of the following reaction(s) is/are correctly representing enthalpy of formation?
1 1 1 1
(A) H2  g   I2  s  
 HI  g  (B) H2  g  CI2  g   HCI   
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 3
(C) H2  g  Br2      HBr  g  (D) P4  s   H2  g   PH3  g 
2 2 2 2
21 Which of the following is/are expected to form inner orbital octahedral complex.
(A) d8(strong field ligand) (B) d8(weak field ligand)
3
(C) d (weak field ligand) (D) d3(strong field ligand)
22. Two flasks A and B have equal volumes. A is maintained at 300 K and B at 600 K, while
A contains H2 gas, B has an equal mass of CH4 gas. Assuming ideal behaviour for both
the gases. Select the correct option.
(The collision diameter of CH4 is twice as that of H2)
Where uav – average speed
 – Mean free path
KE – Kinetic energy
(A) (uav)A = 2(uav)B (B) A = 2B
(C) K.EA = 2K.EB (D) Total K.EA = 4 total K.EB
23. Which of the following statements are correct for SNAr reaction?
(A) Follows second order kinetics (B) KH/KD > 1
(C) Involves carbanion-type intermediate (D) Involves two transition states
24. Select correct statement.

(A) Rate law may not bear a simple relationship to the stoichiometry equation.
(B) Rate law may not depend on the concentration of every reactant.
(C) Rate law may depend on the concentration of product.
(D) in some reaction concept or order of reaction has no meaning.
25. A system undergoes two cyclic processes 1 and 2. Process 1 is reversible and process
2 is irreversible. The correct statement/s relating to the two process is
(A) S(for process 1) = 0, while S(for process)  0.
(B) qcyclic = 0 for process 1 and qcyclic  0 for process 2.
(C) More heat can be converted to work in process 1 than in process 2.
(D) More heat can be converted to heat in process 1 than in process 2.


(I) Cl2 (i) KCN(aq) excess (P) Disproportionation
(II) CuSO4 (ii) NaOH (Q) Precipitation
(III) FeCl3 (iii) NH3(aq) excess (R) Redox
(IV) Hg(NO3)2 (iv) KI(aq) excess (S) Complex formation
26. For Cl2 molecule, the only correct combination is

(A) (I) (i) (Q) (B) (I) (ii) (P)
(C) (I) (i) (S) (D) (I) (iii) (S)
27. For FeCl3 the only correct combination is

(A) (III) (iii) (R) (B) (III) (iv) (R)
(C) (III) (iii) (S) (D) (III) (ii) (S)
28. For the formation of a soluble compound which combination is correct?

(A) (II) (iv) (S) (B) (II) (iv) (R)
(C) (III) (i) (S) (D) (IV) (iv) (R)

(I) Formaldehyde (i) CHCl3/NaOH (P) Substitution
(II) Glucose (ii) Br2(aq) (Q) Disproportionation
(III) Phenol (iii) KOBr (R) Degradation
(IV) Acetamide (iv) NaOH (S) Oxidation
29. The correct combination in which reaction proceeds with hydride transfer is
(A) (I) (iv) (R) (B) (II) (ii) (S)
(C) (IV) (i) (P) (D) (I) (iv) (Q)
30. The correct combination in which an aldehyde is formed

(A) (IV) (iii) (P) (B) (IV) (iii) (R)
(C) (III) (i) (P) (D) (II) (ii) (S)
31. The correct combination in which a produce is formed which can be identified by
reacting with CHCl3/KOH
(A) (I) (iv) (Q) (B) (II) (ii) (S)
(C) (IV) (iii) (R) (D) (III) (i) (P)
SECTION – C
32. The number of isomeric structure of di-substituted borazine (B3N3H4X2) is
33. The number of S-S bond(s) in tetrathionate ion is
34. The number of unpaired electron(s) in K2NiF6 is
35. The number of reducing sugars among the following is:

OMe OH OH
HO O HO O O
HO
OMe
OH OH
HO OH HO OMe HO OH
CH2OH
O OMe O OH O
HO HO
H OH
H OH
HO OH HO OH
H OH
HO HO
O CH2OH
H O
H
H H O OH O
HO HO
OH OH OH
36. The maximum number of dipeptides that could be obtained by reaction of phenylalanine
with leucine is
SECTION – A
37. If the equation x 4  ax 3  bx 2  32x  16  0 has all positive roots, then which of the
following is/are true?
(A) a  8 (B) sum of roots is 8
(C) b  8 (D) b = 24
38. Let a1,a2 ,a3 ......an are different numbers in A.P. and a3 ,a5 ,a8 .b1,b2 ,b3 ...... are in G.P.
and a9  40, then
9 
1 1
(A)  a2i  6144
i 1
(B) b
i 1

18
i
9 
2 1 1
(C) a
i 1
i  6278 (D) b
i 1

28
i
39. Ten persons numbered 1, 2, ….,10 play a chess tournament, each player playing
against every other player exactly one game. It is known that no game ends in a draw. If
w 1, w 2 ,.....w10 are the number of games won by players 1, 2, 3,…..,10, respectively, and
1,  2 ,......10 are the number of games lost by the players 1, 2,……..10, respectively,
then
(A)  w i    i  45 (B) w i   i  9
(C) w i
2
 81    i2 (D) w i
2
   i2
2! 2! 1! 8a
40. Let a, b, c be the sides of triangle ABC such that 2b  a  c . If    ,
1!9! 3!7! 5!5!  2c  !
then
(A) area of ABC is 6 (B) circumradius of ABC is 5
(C) inradius of ABC is 1 (D) ABC is right angled triangle
41. If all the roots of the equation z4  az3  bz 2  cz  d  0  a,b,c,d  R  are of unit
modulus, then
(A) a  4 (B) b  4
(C) c  4 (D) b  6

42. If x  X cos   Y sin , y  X sin   Y cos  and x 2  4xy  y 2  AX 2  BY 2 ; 0    ,
2
then which of the following option(s) is/are correct?
 
(A)   (B)  
6 4
(C) A  B  2 (D) A  B  4
43. In a triangle ABC, let BC = 1, AC = 2 and measure of angle C is 30o . Which of the
following statement(s) is (are) correct?
(A) 2 sin A  sinB
(B) Length of side AB equals 5  2 3
(C) Measure of angle A is less than 30o
(D) Circumradius of triangle ABC is equal to length of side AB

Columns 1, 2 and 3 contains expressions, values of p and related information, respectively.

(I) , ,  are such that 3 q 1
(i) p  (P) 
  a 2 4 2
2
  a2
3
  a3
Then
3     a
4 4

p
, (p, q are
4
a q
coprime)
(II) If px 2  5x  2  0 and p 16 (Q) q = 1
(ii) 
2
3x  10x  q  0 have both roots 15 15
common then
(III) If  2p  q  x 2  p  1 x  5  0 has both (iii) 4 = p q 1
(R) 
roots  . Then 8 2
(IV) 15 (iv) p = 1 (S) Final answer is divisible by 2
If Tn  n.n!, then t
n 1
n  p! q
44. Which of the following represent correct combination?

(A) (I) (iv) (P) (B) (II) (i) (Q)
(C) (IV) (ii) (Q) (D) (IV) (ii) (S)
45. Which of the following represent incorrect combination?

(A) (I) (iii) (Q) (B) (I) (iii) (S)
(C) (III) (iii) (P) (D) (IV) (ii) (Q)

(A) (I) (ii) (Q) (B) (I) (iv) (S)
(C) (II) (i) (Q) (D) (I) (iii) (Q)
Columns 1contains curves and columns 2 and 3 has some information related to them.
(I) xy  2x  4y  4  0 (i) Focus is (P) Conjugate hyperbola is

4  4 2, 4  4 2 
 x  3  y  4   12
(II) xy  4x  4y  32 (ii) Asymptote is x = 3 (Q)  x  4  y  4   16
(III) xy  4x  3y (iii) Eccentricity = 2 (R) 3x 2  y 2  1
(IV) Conic is given by (iv)  x  4  y  2   4 is the (S) Rectangular hyperbola
ea  e  a conjugate hyperbola
x
2 3
e  e a
a
y
2

(A) (I) (iv) (P) (B) (II) (i) (Q)
(C) (IV) (ii) (Q) (D) (IV) (ii) (S)
48. Which of the following represent incorrect combination?

(A) (I) (iv) (S) (B) (II) (i) (Q)
(C) (IV) (iii) (R) (D) (IV) (ii) (Q)

(A) (I) (ii) (Q) (B) (I) (iv) (S)
(C) (II) (i) (P) (D) (I) (iii) (Q)
SECTION – C
50. If a d c b and ad  bc, where a,b,c,d  R  then the family of lines

a x  b y  c   d x  0
2 2 2 2
passes through a fixed point M  x 0 , y 0  . Find the value of
x  y  .
1
0
1
0
51. The circle x 2  y 2  4x  4y  4  0 is inscribed in a triangle which has two of its sides
along the coordinate axes. The locus of the circumcenter of the triangle is
1/2

x  y  xy  k x 2  y 2   0 . Find k k  0  .
52. Let PQ be a variable normal chord of the parabola y 2  4x whose focus is S. If the locus
of the centroid of the triangle SPQ is the curve gy 2  3x  5   ky 4  w where g, k, w,  N ,
find the least value of

g  k  w 
49
53. If the area of the quadrilateral formed by the common tangents of the circle x 2  y 2  25
and the ellipse

x2 y2
  1 is A. Then the value of
3 11A  1
is
 
36 16 333
  2     2  
 4 tan 2 1  tan 2   4 tan 2 1  tan 2 
54. Consider, P   ,  and Q   ,  where , 
 1  tan2  1  tan2    1  tan2  1  tan2  
 2 2  2 2
varies, If the locus of mid point of PQ, which subtends right angle at the origin is
2
  
p x 2  16y 2  q x 2  4y 2  where p,q  N , then find the least value of  p  q  .
1 AIITS-OT (Paper-1)-PCM (Sol.)-JEE(Advanced)/19
OPEN TEST
PAPER-1
1. ABC 19. CD 37. BD
2. ABCD 20. ACD 38. AB
3. A 21. CD 39. ABD
4. A 22. ABD 40. ACD
5. AD 23. ACD 41. ACD
6. ACD 24. ABCD 42. BCD
7. AC 25. AC 43. ACD
8. A 26. B 44. C
9. C 27. B 45. C
10. B 28. C 46. D
11. A 29. D 47. B
12. B 30. C 48. D
13. A 31. C 49. B
14. 8 32. 4 50. 0
15. 0 33. 3 51. 1
16. 3 34. 0 52. 5
17. 2 35. 3 53. 3
18. 2 36. 3 54. 1
AIITS-OT (Paper-1)-PCM (Sol.)-JEE(Advanced)/19 2
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
1. ABC
Sol. T = 0
 U = 0
 Q = W
2. ABCD
mv 2
Sol. T  mgcos 600  … (i) 600
l u
2
1  5  l 1 l
m gl   mg  mv 2 … (ii)

2  2   2 2
3 5
v gl and T  2mg gl
2 2
Net force is in horizontal direction when  = 600
3. A
 2    sin 45 g1 10
Sol. = , 1   =   5 2  50 m / s
3 g 2 sin 45 2
4. A
Sol. Apply PV = nRT
Also,
Process AB  Isothermal
Process BC  Isochoric
Process CA  Isobaric
5. AD
Sol. Property of friction.
6. ACD
Sol. Draw F.B.D. and apply Newton’s law of motion.
7. AC
Sol. R2 is the reaction when block B is stationary
R2 = mg cos 
mg 3
 mgcos 30º 
2
R1 4
Given, 
R2 3
 4   mg 3  2mg
R1     
 3   2  3
If block B moves with acceleration ‘a’ towards left,
2mg
R1 = mgcos 30º ma cos 60º 
3
ma mg
Or 
2 2 3
ag/ 3
For A to remain stationary relative to B, mg sing 30º = ma cos 30º
mg  g   3  mg
 m  
2  3   2  2
Hence, A remains stationary relative to block B, if R1/R2 = 4/3 and for which block B
moves with acceleration of (g / 3 ) .
8. A
Sol. For bounded system the total energy should be negative.
9. C
Sol. For unbounded system the total energy should be positive.
10. B
Sol. Moon is bounded system.
11. A
12. B
13. A
Sol. (for Q. No. 11 – 13)

. About upper end
m 2
J = w (Angular momentum of rod)
3
3J
Or, w = (Angular velocity of rod)
m
1 1 m 2 2
K.E. = I w 2  w
2 2 3
3J2
=
2m

Linear velocity of mid point = w
2
SECTION – C
14. 8
Sol. m  2100  0   5   10 3  3.36  105  420
420  336
m  8  10 3 kg  8gm
2100  5
15. 0
Sol. As force due to water is perpendicular to area its torque will be zero about hinge.
16. 3
4
G R3 
GM 3 4 G
Sol. g 2  2
 R
R R 3
6 g1 1R1 2 R1
  
11 g R 3 R
R1 3 6

R 22
2
V1 M1 R 1 R13 R 23 6  3 2
      6
V M R1  R 3 R1 3  22  22 3
3
v1  11  2  3 kms1
22
17. 2
Sol. For m not to slide over M, acceleration of the triangular block should be gtan if the
required mass in m0, then
m0 g  T  m0  g tan  
& T  M  m  g tan  &
T = 2g tan
& cot = 2
m0 = 2 kg
18. 2
 2
Sol. Xcm  , I  2m
2 2 3
I 2 2
T  2  2
2mgcm 3g
SECTION – A
19. CD
Sol. Process is Pirrerversible adiabatic for an irrerversible adiabatic process Ssurr = 0, Ssys > 0,
hence STotal will also be greater than zero.
20. ACD
Sol. For HCl standard state is gas.
21. CD
Sol. d8 arrangement d2sp3 hybridization is not possible.
22. ABD
3
Sol. K.E  RT
2
T

P
T

2 2P
23. ACD
Sol. In SNAr formation of carbanion in RDS it is a two stop process.
24. ABCD
Sol. Experimental observations.
25. AC
Sol. S is a state function dS = 0
Work done is more in reversible process which require greater amount of heat.
26. B
Sol. Cl2  NaOH 
 NaOCl  NaCl  H2O disproportionation reaction
27. B
Sol. FeCl3  KI  FeI2  I 2  KCl
28. C
Sol. FeCl3  KCN  excess   K 3 Fe  CN6   aq   KCl
29. D
Sol.  HCOONa  CH3OH Cannizaro involves H transfer
HCHO  NaOH 
30. C
Sol. OH OH OH
CHCl3 /NaOH CHO

 
CHO
31. C
KOBr
Sol. CH3CONH2   CH3  NH2
CHCl3 /NaOH
CH3NH2   CH3NC
Foul smelling
compound
SECTION – C
32. 4
Sol. X
H
B B
HN NH X2 N N X
HB BH B B
N N
H
X
X
B B
B N N N N X
N N
B B B B
B B N N
N X
X B
33. 3
Sol. O O
O-S-S-S-S-O
O O
34. 0
Sol.
eg
t g
2
35. 3
Sol. OH OR
C Reducing sugar; C Non reducing sugar
O-R OR
36. 3
Sol. H2N COOH
H2N COOH
NH2
SECTION – A
37. BD
Sol. x 4  ax 3  bx 2  32x  16  0
Its roots are , , , 
  16
1/ 4
   2
1 1 1 1
   2
   
4
 2  GM  HM          2
1

 x 4  ax 2  bx 2  32x  16  x 4  8x 3  24x 2  32x  16
38. AB
Sol. We get a1  8, a 2  12, a3  16,a5  24, a8  36
b1  54
1

1 1
  54 
i 1 bi 2 18
1
3
39. ABD
10
Sol. Clearly, each player will play 9 games, And total number of games is C2  45 . Clearly,
w i   i  9 and  w  
i i  45
 w i  9   i  w i2  81   2i  18 i
  w i2  81 10   2i  18   i
 810    2i  18  45   2i
40. ACD
1
Sol.
10!
210 C1  210 C3  10C5 
10
C1  10C3  10C5  10 C7  10 C9

10!
29 83 8a
    a  3, b  4, c  5
10!  2.5  !  2.c  !
41. ACD
Sol. z4  az3  bz2  cz  d  0  a,b,c,d  R 
Let roots are z1,z 2 ,z3 ,z 4
z1  z 2  z 3  z 4  1
z1  z2  z3  z 4  a
z1z2  z1z3  z1z 4  z 2 z3  z 2 z 4  z3 z 4  b
z1z2 z3  z1z2 z 4  z1z3 z 4  z2 z3 z 4  c
z1z2 z3 z 4  d
z1  z 2  z 3  z 4  z 1  z 2  z 3  z 4
a  4; b  6; c  4; d 1
42. BCD
Sol. x 2  4xy  y 2  AX 2  BY
2
  X cos   Y sin    4  X cos   Y sin  
2
 X sin   Y cos     X sin   Y cos  
 AX2  BY 2  comparing coefficient
  sin 2  4 cos 2  sin 2  0  coefficient of XY
A  1  2sin 2
B  1  2 sin 
n  
 cos 2  0     
2 4 4
XY XY
and x  ,y
2 2
 x  4xy  y  3x  Y 2  A  3, B  1
2 2 2
43. ACD
a b 1 2
Sol. (i) From Sine law,   
sin A sinB sin A sinB
 2sin A  sinB (True)
(ii) From cosine law in
12  22  c 2
ABC, cos 30o  A
2 1 2 
3  5  c2 
   2 3  5  c2
2  4  b=2
c=?
c  52 3
(iii) As c  a  C  A
 Angle B must be obtuse
 Measure of less than 30o o
B 30
1 1 1 C
(iv)   ab sinC    1 2  sin30o  a=1
2 2 2
abc 1 .  2  .  c 
So, R   c
4  1
4 
2
 Circumradius of ABC is equal to length of side AB.
44. C
45. C
46. D
Sol. (for Q. No. 44 – 46)
1.    0 and   O
   4  a4
P 5 2
2.  
3 10 q
3
P ,q4
2
3. Coefficient x 2  0  Coefficient x = 0
4. Write tn  n  1 ! n!
47. B
48. D
49. B
Sol. (for Q. No. 47-49)
(I) Hyperbola is  x  4  y  2   4
(II) Hyperbola is  x  4  y  4   16
(III) Hyperbola is  x  3  y  4   12
(IV) 2 3x  ea  e  a
2y  e a  e a
2
2 3x  2
  2y   4
SECTION – C
50. 0
Sol. We have a  d  2 ad  c  b  2 bc
 a  d  c  b (As ad = bc)
 a2  d2  2ad  c 2  b2  2bc  a 2  d2  c 2  b2
 
 a2  d2 x  b 2 y  c 2  0

 b2  c 2 x  b 2 y  c 2  0
 b  y  x   c 2  x  1  0
2
c2
 y  x   x  1  0
b2
Which is of the form L1  L 2  0
So, fixed point is (–1, 1)   x0 , y 0  (Given)

Hence, x01  y 01  1  1  0 
51. 1
2 2
Sol. The equation of the given circle is x 2  y 2  4x  4y  4  0 or  x  2    y  2   4
y
B (0, 2k)
D (h, k)
C (2, 2)
O (2h, 0) A
This circle touches both the axes.

Variable line AB touches the circle.
Now, the circumcircle of triangle OAB is the midpoint of hypotenuse AB.
Let the midpoint of AB be M (h, k).
Therefore, the coordinates of A and B are (2h, 0) and (0, 2k) respectively.
x y
So, the equation of AB is  1
2h 2k
Since this line touches the given circle, CM = 2
2 2
 1
2h 2k
 2
2 2
1
    1
 2h    2k 
   
or h  k  hk  h2  k 2
or the locus is  x  y  xy   x 2  y 2  0
Therefore, k  1
52. 5
Sol. 
We have 3h  t12  t 22  1  …………(1)
3k  2  t1  t 2  …………(2)
2
and t 2   t1  …………(3)
t1
2
 t1  t 2 
t1
Eliminate t1 and t 2 to get
y
P (t1)
O S (1, 0)
x
Q (t2)
3k 2 4
   t1 
2 t1 3k
3k 4
t2  
2 3k
Substitute the values of t1 and t 2 in (1) we get
2
16  3k 4 
3h     1
9k 2  2 3k 
32 9k 2
3h  2  5
9k 4
 3x  5  36y 2  128  81y 4
Hence g  36; k  81 and w  128
 g  k  w   245
53. 3
Sol. y  mx  36m2  16
0  0  36m2  16
5 
1  m2
y
 500 
 0, 
 11 
x 2  y 2  25
 500   500 
  , 0  , 0 
3 
  O
 3 x
x 2 / 36  y 2 / 16  1
 500 
 0,  
 11 
9 3 500
 m2  y x
11 11 11
1 500 500 1000
Required Area  4    
2 11 3 3 11
54. 1
Sol. P  2 tan ,sec   ; Q  2 tan , sec  
x2
Locus of P and Q is y 2  1 - - - - (1)
4
consider mid point of PQ is M (h, k)
 equation of PQ by T = S1
4yk  xh  4k 2  h2  0
Homogenising equation (1)
4yk  xh
1
4k 2  h2
2
 4yk  xh 
 4y 2  x 2  4  2 2 
0
 4k  h 
(Represents combined equation of OP and OQ)
 OP  OQ
 Coefficient of x 2 + coefficient of y 2  0
 
16k 2  h2
 4  1 4  0
 4k 2  h2 2 
   
2

 3 4k 2  h2  
 4 16k 2  h2 
 locus of M (h, k)
2

 3 4y 2  x 2  
 4 16y 2  x 2 
OPEN TEST
Paper 2

t h e t es t .
INSTRUCTIONS
4. Each part is further divided into three sections: Section-A, Section-C & Section-D.
on OMR sheet.

1. Section-A (01 – 03, 24 – 26, 47 – 49) contains 9 multiple choice questions which have only one
correct answer. Each question carries +3 marks for correct answer and –1 mark for wrong
answer.
Section-A (04 – 08, 27 – 31, 50 – 54) contains 15 multiple choice questions which have one or
more than one correct answer. Each question carries +4 marks for correct answer and –2
marks for wrong answer.
Section-A (09 – 10, 32 – 33, 55 – 56) contains 3 paragraphs. Based upon paragraph, 2 multiple
choice questions have to be answered. Each question has only one correct answer and carries
+3 marks for correct answer. There is no negative marking.
2. Section-C (11 – 20, 34 – 43, 57 – 66) contains 30 Numerical based questions with answer as
negative marking.
XXXXX.XX and each question carries +4 marks for correct answer and –1 mark for wrong
answer.
Enrolment No.
Useful Data
PHYSICS
2
Acceleration due to gravity g = 10 m/s
Permittivity of free space 0 = 8.85  1012 C2/N-m2
CHEMISTRY

= 0.0821 Lit atm K1 mol1
= 1.987  2 Cal K1 mol1
= 6.625  10–27 ergs
1 amu = 1.66  10–27 kg
1 eV = 1.6  10–19 J

N=9, Na=11, Mg=12, Si=14, Al=13, P=15, S=16,
Cl=17, Ar=18, K =19, Ca=20, Cr=24, Mn=25,
Fe=26, Co=27, Ni=28, Cu = 29, Zn=30, As=33,
Br=35, Ag=47, Sn=50, I=53, Xe=54, Ba=56,
Pb=82, U=92.
F=19, Na=23, Mg=24, Al = 27, Si=28, P=31, S=32,
Cl=35.5, K=39, Ca=40, Cr=52, Mn=55, Fe=56, Co=59,
Ni=58.7, Cu=63.5, Zn=65.4, As=75, Br=80, Ag=108,
Sn=118.7, I=127, Xe=131, Ba=137, Pb=207, U=238.
(SECTION – D)

If answer is 348.4 / 251.37 / 213
Correct Method :
0 0 3 4 8 . 4 0
0 0 2 5 1 . 3 7
0 0 2 1 3 . 0 0
Wrong Method :
3 4 8 . 4
3 4 8 . 4
3 4 8 . 4
3 4 8 . 4
2 5 1 . 3 7
2 1 3 .
2 1 3 . 0
2 1 3 . 0
3 4 8 . 4 0
2 5 1 . 3 7
2 1 3 . 0 0
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
(One Options Correct Type)
This section contains 3 multiple choice questions. Each question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and
(D), out of which ONLY ONE option is correct.
1. Force acting on a particle moving in a straight line varies with the velocity of the particle
k
as F  , where k is a constant. The work done by this force in time t is:
v
k
(A) 2 t (B) 2kt
v
2kt
(C) kt (D) 2
v
2. A uniform rod of length ‘l’ is pivoted at point ‘A’. It is struck by a A
horizontal force which delivers an impulse ‘J’ at a distance ‘x’
from point ‘A’ as shown in figure, impulse delivered by pivot is O
zero if ‘x’ is equal to
l l
(A) (B) x
2 3
2l 3l
(C) (D)
3 4
J
3. The velocity of a particle moving in the positive direction of x-axis varies as v  A x.

The graph of displacement versus time is:
x x
(A) (B)
t t
x x
(C) (D)
t t

This section contains FIVE questions. Each question has FOUR options (A), (B), (C) and (D). ONE OR
4. A block of mass 10 kg is placed on a rough inclined plane of

inclination 370 (tan 370 = 3/4). The coefficient of friction between 10kg
block and surface is 0.4. A horizontal force F = 50 N is applied F
on the block, then (g = 10 m/s2)
=0.4
(A) acceleration of block is zero.
(B) acceleration of block is 2.4 m/s2 along the inclined plane. 370
(C) frictional force between block and surface is 44 N.
(D) frictional force between block and surface is 20 N.
5. An ideal gas has a molar heat capacity Cv at constant volume. The molar heat capacity
of this gas as a function of its volume , V
 R  V
(A) is  Cv   if the gas undergoes the process T  T0 e
 V 
 2R  V
(B) is  Cv   if the gas undergoes the process T  T0 e
  V 
 R  V
(C) is  Cv   if the gas undergoes the process P  P0 e
 (1  V) 
 R  V
(D) is  Cv   if the gas undergoes process P  P0 e
 V 
6. A sound wave is traveling along positive x-direction. Y

Displacement (y) of particles from their mean positions at
any time t is shown in the figure.
(A) Particle located at S has zero velocity. P Q R S T x
(B) Particle located at T has its velocity in the negative
direction.
(C) Change in pressure at S is zero
(D) Particles located near R are under compression.
7. A particle is projected at an angle  = 30º with the horizontal, with a velocity of 10 m/s
then
(A) After 2 s the velocity of particle makes an angle of 60º with initial velocity vector
(B) At 1 s the velocity of particle makes an angle of 60º with initial velocity vector
(C) The magnitude of velocity of particle after 1 s is 10 m/s
(D) The magnitude of velocity of particle after 1 s is 5 m/s
8. A 10 kg block is resting on a rough horizontal F (N)

surface. A horizontal force F is applied to it for
4s. The variation of force with time is shown in 10 kg F 100 N
the figure. (µs = µk = 0.5, g = 10 m/s2). Then
(A) At t = 1 sec, velocity of block is 5 m/s 4s
(B) At t = 1 sec, velocity of block is zero
(C) At t = 4 sec, velocity of block is 20 m/s
(D) At t = 4 sec, velocity of block is 5 m/s
(Paragraph Type)
This section contains ONE paragraph. Based on the paragraph, there are TWO questions. Each question
has FOUR options (A), (B), (C) and (D). ONLY ONE of these four options is correct.
Consider a monoatomic ideal gas undergoing a process AB P

(Vo, 4Po)
A
as shown in figure.
(4Vo, Po)
B
V
9. Find the maximum temperature of the gas if temperature at A is To.

21 23
(A) To (B) To
16 16
25 27
(C) To (D) To
16 16
10. Volume at which the process becomes exothermic from endothermic is

19 21
(A) Vo (B) Vo
8 8
23 25
(C) Vo (D) Vo
8 8
SECTION – C
This section contains TEN questions. The answer to each question is a single Digit integer ranging from 0
to 9, both inclusive.
11. A stone is projected with initial velocity u  2 2 m / s at an angle  = 450 with the
horizontal, find the angular velocity in rad/sec of the stone with respect to the point of
projection, when it is at its maximum height. (take g = 10 m/s2)
12. A particle of mass m is fired from the point A (as shown in the figure) A 30°
situated at a distance of 2R from the center of the planet with a
1 R
velocity times the escape velocity from point A. The radius of the
2
planet is R. The maximum distance of the particle from the centre in
R
the subsequent motion is nR. Find the value of n.
3t 2
13. Power supplied to a particle of mass 2kg varies with time as P  watt, where t is in
2
seconds. If velocity of particle at t = 0 is v = 0, the velocity of particle at t = 2sec will be
(in m/s).
14. In the figure, find the minimum value of mass ‘m’ (in kg) of the rod
rod so that the block of mass M =12 kg remains stationary on
m
the inclined plane (take g = 10 m/s2) assume there is no  = 0.5
friction between rod and block
M
370
15. A tube has two area of cross-sections as shown in

figure . The diameter of the tube are 8mm and 2mm.
Find range (in m) of water falling on horizontal
surface, if piston is moving with a constant velocity of h
0.25 m/s, h = 1.25m (g = 10 m/s2)
16. If the intensity of sound is doubled, by how many decibels does the sound level
increase?
(in dB) (approx)
17. Two rods are of same material and have same length and area. Heat Q flow through
them in 12 minutes, when they joined side by side. If now both the rods are joined in
parallel, then in what time ( in minutes ) the same amount of heat Q will flow.
18. If y is adiabatic exponent of a perfect gas. The no. of degree of freedom of a molecule of
n
the gas is then n = ?
y 1
19. A point mass mA is connected to a point mass mB by a massless

rod of length l as shown in the figure. It is observed that the ratio of
the moment of inertia of the system about the two axes BB and AA,
which is parallel to each other and perpendicular to the rod is
IBB
 3 . The distance of the centre of mass of the system from the
IAA
mass A is l/K. find K.
20. A bus is moving towards a huge wall with a velocity of 5 m/s. The driver sounds a horn
of frequency 200Hz. The frequency of the beats heard by a passenger of the bus will be
(In Hz) nearly (velocity of sound in air = 338 m / s )
SECTION – D
(Numerical Based XXXXX.XX answer Type)
This section contains 3 questions. Each question, when worked out will result in numerical answer Type
with answer xxxxx.xx.
21. A monkey of mass m is sitting on a platform of mass M. Monkey can jump with a velocity
of 5 m/s making an angle 370 with the horizontal with respect to platform.
To jump the monkey 1 meter with respect to the ground. Find out the value of m/M.
22. A light wooden rod fixed at one end is kept horizontal and a spring is attached
perpendicular to the rod at its other end such that it is at its natural length. A load of 0.4
kg tied to the free end of the rod causes that end to be depressed by 2.8 cm. If this load
is set into up and down vibrations, with what frequency will it oscillate?
23. A thin uniform bar lies on a frictionless surface and is free

to move in any way on the surface. Its mass is 0.16 kg 10 m/s
and length 3 metres. Two particles each of mass 0.08 kg
are moving on the same surface and towards the bar in a 0.5 m
direction perpendicular to the bar, one with a velocity 10
3m
m/s and the other with 6 m/s as shown in Figure. The first
6 m/s 0.5 m
particle strikes the bar at A and the other at the point B.
The points A and B are at distances 0.5 m from centre of
the bar. The particles strike the bar at the same instant of
time and stick to the bar on collision. Calculate the loss of
kinetic energy of the system on the above collision
process.
SECTION – A
24. NH3  O 2  N2  H2O

If molecular weights of NH3 and N2 are M1 and M2 respectively, and their equivalent
weights are E1 and E2 respectively, then (M1 – M2) is equal to
(A) 3E1 – 6E2 (B) 3E1 – 3E2
(C) 6E1 – 6E2 (D) 6E1 – 3E2
25. Which is the correct relationship between three bond angles given below
O O O
P P P
1 2 3
Cl Cl Br Br F F
Cl Br F
(A) 1  2  3 (B) 1  3  2
(C) 3  1  2 (D) 1  2  3
26. In each of the following total pressure set-up at equilibrium is assumed to be equal and
is 1 atm. With equilibrium constants Kp given as K1, K2 & K3 for I, II & III equilibria
respectively, which of the following is correct ?
I. CaCO3(s)  CaO(s) + CO2(g), K1
II. NH4HS(s)  NH3(g) + H2S(g), K2
III. NH2CO2NH4(s)  2NH3(g) + CO2(g), K3
(A) K1 = K2 = K3 (B) K1 < K2 < K3
(C) K3 < K2 < K1 (D) None of these

27. Identify the correct statement(s)?

(A) |  | 2 is the probability of finding the electron in an orbital
(B) p-orbital is directional in nature
(C) dx2  y 2 has dumb bell shape along x and y-axis
(D) dz2 has dumb bell shape along z-axis
28. Which of the following are correct?

(A) Magnesium with dil. HNO3 produces hydrogen
(B) H2O2 bleaches by oxidation of coloured pigment
(C) H2O2 reduces KMnO4 only in alkaline medium
(D) The position of hydrogen is fixed in periodic table
29. In which of the following the position of equilibrium will shift towards forward reaction by
adding inert gas at constant pressure?
(A) PCl5 (g)  PCl3 (g)  Cl2 (g) (B) N2 (g)  3H2 (g)  2NH3 (g)
(C) COCl2 (g)  CO(g)  Cl2 (g) (D) CO(g)  2H2 (g)  CH3OH(g)
30. For pure water at 25°C

(A) [H2O] = 55.56 mol dm–3 if density of water is 1g cm–3.
(B) Kw = 1.0 × 10–14 (mol dm–3)2
(C) degree of dissociation,  = 1.8 × 10–9
(D) ionization constant, Kionization = 1.8 × 10–16 mol dm–3.
31. Which of the following is not a resonating structure of the others ?

(A) O (B) O

(C) O (D) 
O

(Paragraph Type)
Chlorination of propene at 770K gives substitution product as shown:

770K
CH3  CH  CH2  Cl2   Cl  CH2  CH  CH2  HCl
Above reaction proceeds via free radical mechanism
32. Select the intermediate formed in above reaction. Taking place at 770 K?
 
(A) H3C  CH  CH3 (B) CH2  CH  CH2
 
(C) Cl  CH2  CH  CH3 (D) CH2  CH  CH2
33. What reaction is followed when halogenation of propene is carried out at room
temperature?
(A) Substitution (B) Addition
(C) Elimination (D) No reaction
SECTION – C
34. How many of the following are stronger acids than phenol?
OH OH OH OH
CH3 COOH NO 2 OH
CH3OH , , , ,
OH OH
Cl
,
Cl
35. How many of the following would give E1 reactions easily (considering alkyl halides can
undergo E1 on addition of suitable reagent)?
Br , Br , CH3Br, CH3CH2Br, (CH3)3CBr,
CH2Br , CHCH2Br
36. How many of the following species has bond order equal to 2.
N2 , O22+ , NO+ , CN
O 2 , N22 , NO  , NO2+
NO, NΘ2 , O+2 , NO 2+
37. What is the azimuthal quantum number of the highest energetic electron of aluminium?
38. A sample of air consisting of N2 and O2 was heated to 2500 K until the equilibrium

N2(g) + O2(g)  
 2NO(g)
was established with an equilibrium constant Kc = 2.1 × 10–3. At equilibrium, the moles %
NO were 1.8. Then the initial composition of N2 in air is 20x. Then x is:
39. At same temperature and under a pressure of 4 atm, PCl5 is 10% dissociated. the
pressure at which PCl5 will be 20% dissociated, temperature remaining same is :
40. 

The Kp for the reaction N2O 4 (g) 
 2NO2 (g) is 640 mm at 773 K. Then the pressure at
which the dissociation will be 50% is 120x. The value of x is:
41. How many lone pairs of electrons are present in the structure of ClF3.
42. In the bromination of following compound , Br+ goes to which position as major
product?
2 1 O 10 9
3 O C 8
4 5 6 7
43. At 540 K 0.10 mole of PCl5 are heated in a 8 litre. The pressure of the equilibrium
mixture is found to be 1.0 atm. Then the Kc for the reactions x × 10–2 mol/lit. The value
of x is:
SECTION – D
44. 

PCl5  g  
 PCl3  g   Cl2  g . At 2 atm pressure PCl5 is 50% dissociated. Find its KP.
45.
27oC
O2 Vaccum 27oC
2 mole
1 litre 2 litre
Find the pressure of the gas after opening the stopper.
46. How many mole of Bromo form will be produced from 4.59 mole of Br2.
SECTION – A
47. There are 18 ways in which n identical balls can be grouped such that each group
contains equal number of balls. Then the minimum value of n is
(A) 120 (B) 180
(C) 160 (D) 90
48. Two variable chords AB and BC of a circle x 2  y 2  a 2 are such that AB = BC = a, then
locus of point of intersection of tangents at A and C is a circle of radius
(A) a 2 (B) 2a
(C) 4a (D) none of these
49. If 4 sin x.cos y  2 sin x  2 cos y  1  0 where x, y  0, 2 ; then the largest possible
value of the sum  x  y 
23  19 
(A) (B)
6 6
15  27 
(C) (D)
6 6

4 4 4
50. The equation  4  x   1  x    5  2x  has
(A) All real roots (B) 2 Real roots
(C) 2 complex roots (D) All complex roots
 1 sin2 x sin3 y 1 sin x sin4 y

51. Let 0  x, y,z  such that sin x sin y cos z  ,  and
2 2 2 cos z 4 2 cos2 z
1
 , then which of the following is(are) correct?
8
3 3
(A) sin x  sin y  (B) cos  x  y  
2 2
(C) tan  x  y  z   3  2 (D) sec  y  z   6  2
52. Two lines from the family of lines 1  2  x  1    y  1  0 and the line x  y  5 form
an equilateral triangle. The equation of the two lines can be
 
(A) y  2  2  3  x  1  0 
(B) y  2  2  3   x  1  0
(C) y  2   3  2   x  1 (D) y  1   3  2   x  2 
53. Two distinct tangents can be drawn from the point  2t ,t 

2
t  R to the image of
y  x 2  2x  3 under the line y = x then t cannot lie in the interval
(A) t   , 1 (B) t   1,3 
(C) t   3,   (D) t   7, 10 
54. Let p and q be roots of the equation x 2  2x  a  0 & let r & s be the roots of the
equation x 2  18x  b  0 if p < q < r < s are in A.P., then
(A) p + q + r + s = 20 (B) q = 3, r = 7
(C) a = 83, b =  3 (D) a = 3, b = 77
(Paragraph Type)
Equation of tangent at point P(1, 1) on hyperbola H1 is x + y = 2 which cuts its conjugate

hyperbola H2 at points A and B such that AB = 6 2 units. Centre of hyperbola H1 is (0, 0)
55. Combined equation of asymptotes is

(A) 7x2 + 7y2 + 22xy = 0 (B) 7x2 + 7y2 22xy = 0
(C) 7x2 + 7y2 + 12 2 xy = 0 (D) 7x2 + 7y2 12 2 xy = 0
56. Equation of hyperbola is

(A) 7x2 + 7y2 22xy + 8 = 0 (B) 7x2 + 7y2 + 22xy 36 = 0
(C) 7x2 + 7y2 + 12 2 xy 14 12 2=0 (D) 7x2 + 7y2 x 2 xy 14 + 12 2=0
SECTION – C
3n n
 3n   3n  n n!
57. Let n  , Sn     and Tn     then Sn  3Tn , is (Where    )____
r 0  r  r  0  3r   r  r !. n  r  !
x2 y2
58. A circle ‘C’ intersecting the ellipse   1 such that common chord is of maximum
16 9
length, and intersecting the circle x2 + y2 6x 10y + 9 = 0 orthogonally, then number of
common tangents of circle ‘C’ and circle x2 + y2  10x  11 = 0 is
1 sin4 x
59. The number of solutions of the equation  sin 2x  cos 2x  = 2 in [  , ] is ………
60. Two positive real numbers a and b satisfy 2  log2 a  3  log3 b  log6  a  b  . Such that
1 1
the value of  is 21.32 , then 1   2 is ____________
a b

61. Let ,  be conjugate complex number such that 2 is real numbers and     2 3

then  is _________.
62. A point ‘A’ is taken on the line x–y+2=0 at a distance of 2 2 unit from the point(3,5) in
the decreasing direction of ordinate, if A is the vertex of ABC and equation of angle
bisector of ABC is x + y=2, and side BC always pass through the point (h, k), then
h2+k2 is equal to
63. Suppose the graph of quadratic function f  x    x 2  bx  c intersects x-axis at A and B.

If point P  x 0 ,f(x0 ) , (where f(x0 )  0, ) is on the curve and PA is perpendicular to PB ,
then f(x 0 )  ________
64. The positive integer n and k , satisfies the

6 6 3 2
 n  n  2  n  3  2 n  2  n  3 
       3n     , then n + k =__________
 n  1  k   n  1   k   2 
65. The number of permutations  a,b,c, x, y,z  of (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) which satisfy the five
inequalities a  b  c, x  y  z, a  x, b  y, and c  z is _______________
5 4
66.  
If x, y  1, 1 , cos sin1 x  sin cos1 y    2
  
and 1  x 2 1  y 2  , then let
9
a2
x2  y2  for positive integers a and b. Find a  b .
b2  3
SECTION – D
67. Let f(x) be a function such that f(x) = x3 and the line x + y = 0 is tangent to the graph of
f(x). Then the value of f  6 
68. An equilateral triangle with one vertex  4,3  has two other vertices on the lines
3x  4y  20  0 and 3x  4y  10  0 . If the length of the side of the triangle is x , then
x2 is.
69. Given that 50 sin2 t  5 m sin t   4m  41  0 ,

25m2
50 cos2 t  5m cos t   4m  41  0 and tan t  1, then the value of
4

OPEN TEST
PAPER-2
1. C 24. A 47. B
2. C 25. C 48. B
3. B 26. C 49. B
4. AD 27. D 50. BC
5. AC 28. B 51. ACD
6. ABCD 29. AC 52. AB

7. BC 30. ABCD 53. ACD
8. BD 31. A 54. ABD
9. C 32. B 55. A
10. D 33. B 56. B
11. 2 34. 4 57. 2

12. 3 35. 3 58. 2
13. 2 36. 4 59. 2
14. 6 37. 1 60. 5
15. 2 38. 4 61. 2
16. 3 39. 1 62. 2
17. 3 40. 4 63. 1

18. 2 41. 2 64. 8
19. 4 42. 3 65. 5
20. 6 43. 4 66. 8

21. 00001.40 44. 00000.66 67. 00324.75
22. 00005.18 45. 00016.40 68. 00037.33
23. 00002.72 46. 00001.53 69. 00400.00
Physics PART – I
SECTION – A
1. C
k
Sol. F
v
dv k k
m  ;  vdv   dt
dt v m
2
mv
= kt
2
Work done by force = change in kinetic energy.
2. C
 L L J
Sol. J  x    I w Vcm =
 2 2 m
 LL
J x  
L J 2 2 J
  Vcm  ;    L
2 M I m x  2
 
ML2 J
I=
12
3. B
Sol. vA x
dx dx
a x ;  adt ; x  t2
dt x
4. AD
Sol. fmax = 0.4  110 = 44 N 40N
40 + f = 60 N
f
f = 20 N
a=0
30N
60N 80N
5. AC
P(dV)
Sol. C  Cv  …(i)
n(dT)
dT
 To  ev …(ii)
dV
From (i) and (ii)
R
C  Cv 
V
6. ABCD
 dy 
Sol. Particle velocity vp = –v  
 dx 
v is the wave velocity.
dy
is the slope.
dx
At point S, slope is zero, there force Vp at S is zero.
At point T, slope is (+)ve, there fore Vp will be along –ve x direction
dy
Excess pressure dP = –B.
dx
At point S, slope is zero
 dP = 0.
At point R, slope is –ve
 dP is (+) ve i.e., particles located near C are under compression.
7. BC
1
2  10  30º
2usin  2  1s .
Sol. T  30º
g 10
30º 30º
8. BD
4
 25t  50 
Sol. V   dt
2 10 
9. C
Po V
Sol. P  5Po 
Vo
1  Po V 2 
T 5P
 o V  
nR  Vo 
dT 1  2Po V 
  5Po   =0
dV nR  Vo 
5V
 V  o at maximum temperature.
2
25
 Tmax  To
16
10. D
dQ P dV
Sol.  Cv  0
ndT n dT
 Po V 
 5Po  
 Vo  nR
CV   0
n  2Po V 
 5Po  
 Vo 
 V 
5  
 Vo  3

 2V  2
5  
 Vo 
25
 V= Vo
8
SECTION – C
11. 2

V v
Sol.  = 
r 
V
r
12. 3
Sol. Let v0 be the velocity required to send a particle to infinity from point A. A 30°
1 GMm
mv 20  =0
2 2R R
GM
 v0 =
R R
 velocity of projection at A
1 GM
vp = v0 =
2 2R
vp
30°
A
B
R r v
Let v be the velocity at the highest point and r be its distance from
the center of the plant A.
1 GMm GM
mv 20  =0  v0
2 2R R
 velocity of projection at A
1 GM
vp = v0 =
2 2R
Let v be the velocity at the highest point and r be its distance from the
center of the planet. Using Conservation of angular momentum.
m vp 2 Rcos30° = m vr
3R GM 3GMR
 v=  …(1)
r R 2r 2
From conservation on the mechanical energy at A and B
GMm 1 GM GMm 1
–  m. =–  mv2
2R 2 2R r 2
replacing the value of v from (1) in the above eqn.
GM GM 1 3 GMR
– =–    r2 – 4Rr + 3R2= 0
4R r 2 2 r2
 (r – 3R)(r – R)= 0  r = R, r = 3R
13. 2
1
Sol. m V 2   Pdt 
2
t3
V2 = 4
2
V=2
14. 6
Sol. For equilibrium of block rod
Mg sin  = (N) m  = 0.5
= (Mg cos  + mg cos )
M
370
15. 2
Sol. Velocity of efflux = 16 × 0.25 = 4 m/s2
2h
Time of fall of the liquid = = 0.25 sec.
g
Thus, range on horizontal surface = velocity of efflux × time of fall = 2 m.
16. 3
I
Sol. We know that Loudness  = 10 log10
I0
I
According to the problems A  10log10
I0
2I
B  10log10  3dB
I0
17. 3
 q 
Sol. T    (R)
 t 
Rods connected in series:

 q 
T    (2R) …(1)
 12 
Rods connected in parallel:
 q   R 
T     …(2)
 t  2
T 1

T 4
T
 T = = 3 min.
4
18. 2
fR R
Sol. Cv = 
2  1
2
 f=
(   1)
19. 4
m A 2
Sol. 3
mB  2
mA mB  
 3 ; x CM   .
mB m A  mB 4
20. 6
 338  5 
Sol. f  f   1  6
 338  5 
SECTION – D
21. 00001.40
Sol. VmM  4iˆ  3 ˆj
m
V  u î  3 ˆj
m M
VM   Viˆ
Here, along horizontal direction mVm  MVM  0
um 4
 V  u and u  V  4  u 
M 1 
To move one meter w.r.t. ground
4
2 3
1  24 14
1  1   or    1.40
g g 10
22. 00005.18 Hz
 m 2 
Sol. Tsp = –K2 =  
 3 
 3K 
   
m
m 1
T  2  f .
3K T
23. 00002.72 J
Sol. Loss in KE = Kf – Ki
1 2 1
K f  mv cm  Icm 2
2 2
1 1
Ki  (0.08) (10)2  (0.08) (6)2
2 2
Apply conservation of momentum and angular momentum to get Vcm and .
SECTION – A
24. A
NA no of electron will be removed by
6.023  1023
 16 gm of metal M
2.25  1023
= 42.83 gm of metal M
 equiv. wt. of metal is 42.83
25. C
Sol. Higher electronegativity, higher bond length
26. C
Sol. Pequm = 1 atm
K1  pCO2  1atm
K 2  pNH3  pH2S = 0.5  0.5 = 2.5  10–2 atm2 = 0.25 atm2
2
2 2 1

K 3  pNH3   pCO2    
3 3
4 1 4
    0.148 atm3
9 3 27
 The order is K1 > K2 > K3
27. D
Sol. It is dumbbell along Z axis
28. B
Sol. Fact Based.
29. AC
Sol. Addition of inert gas at constant pressure shift the reaction towards greater number of
moles.
30. ABCD
moles Mass of one litre H2O 1000
Sol. (A) H2O    = 55.55 mol L–1 = 55.55 mol dm–3
Vol. in L  Molar mass 18
1L
(B) Kw = [H+] [OH–] = 10–7  10–7 = 1  10–14
(C) Degree of dissociation = 
[H+] = C
H  107
or,       1.8  109
C 55.55
H  OH 
(D) Ionization constant(Kionization) =
H2O
C  C 2C
  = 2C ( is very small)
C 1    1  
= (1.8  10–9)2  55.5 = 1.8  10–16 mol dm–3
31. A
Sol. O O O(-)
(-) (-)
32. B

Sol. At 770 k, Cl2  2C l
 
(i)CH3  CH  CH2  2C l  CH2  CH  CH2  HCl
 
(ii)CH2  CH  CH2  C l  Cl  CH2  CH  CH2
33. B
Sol. Addition takes place.
SECTION – C
34. 4
Sol. OH OH OH OH
COOH NO 2 Cl
, ,
,
Cl
35. 3
Sol.
Br, (CH3)3CBr, CH2Br
36. 4
Sol. Fact calculated from MOT
37. 1
Sol. Highest energetic orbital is p-orbital
38. 4
Sol. N2  O2 


 2NO
Initial a (100–a) 0
Final (a – x) (100 – a – x) 2x
2x 1.8
Given  x = 0.9
100 100
[NO]2
Also K P = Kc =
[N2 ][O 2 ]
(2x)2
=
(a – x)(100 – a – x)
= 2.1 × 10–3
a= 79% ; 100 – a = 21%
39. 1
Sol. 

PCl5 
 PCl3  Cl2
Mole before
dissociation 1 0 0
mole after 1-x x x
n
nPCl3  nCl2
 P 
Kp =   ......(i)
nPCl5 n
At P = 0.1x = 4 atm,
By equation (i)
1
0.1  0.1  4 
Kp =  
0.9  1.1
= 0.0404 atm
At = 0.2
1
0.2  0.2  P 
0.0404 =   :
0.8  1.2 
P = 0.969 atm
40. 4
Sol. 

N2O4 
 2NO2
Mole before equillibrium 1 0
Mole at equilibrium (1 – x 2x
n
4x 2  P 
Kp = 
(1 – x)   n 
4x 2 160
640 =
(1– x) (1  x)
4x 2
4=
1 – x2
or 1 – x2 = x2
2x2 = 1
1
x2 =
2
or x = 0.707 = 70.7%
When x = 0.5, let pressure be P.
4  (0.5)2 P
Then Kp = 640 = 
0.5 1.5
P = 480 mm
41. 2
Sol.
ClF3 :
This is the electronic structure of chlorine atom in the excited state.
In ClF3 sp2d hybridisation occurs, 3 unpaired electrons form bounds with fluorine atoms,
and 2 lone pairs occupying 2 corners of a distorted trigonal bipyramidal structure.
42. 3
Sol. Fact based
43. 4
Sol. 

PCl5 
 PCl3  Cl2
Mole before
dissociation 0.1 0 0
mole after (0.1 – x) x x
dissociation
Given volume of container = 8 litre
x x
.
[PCl3 ][Cl2 ] x2
Now Kc = = 8 8 = ....... (i)
[PCl5 ] (0.1– x) 8(0.1– x)
8
Also, PV = nRT for the equilibrium mixture at 540 K.
1 × 8 = (0.1 + x) × 0.082 0 × 540
x = 0.08 ...... (ii)
0.08  0.08
Kc =
8(0.1 – 0.08)
= 4 × 10–2 mole litre–1
SECTION – D
44. 00000.66
Sol. 
PCl5  
 PCl3  Cl2
P
P(1 - 0.5) 0.5P 0.5P
= 0.5 P
4
0.5 P + 0.5 P + 0.5 P = 2  P =
3
4
 KP = 0.5 P = 0.5  = 0.66 atm
3
45. 00016.40
nRT 2  0.082  300
Sol. P   16.40 atm
V 3
46. 00001.53
Sol. O O
R  C  CH3  3Br2  Br3C  C  R  3HBr

NaOH
CHBr3  R  COONa
SECTION – A
47. B
Sol. The total numbers of required ways = the total number of factors of n.
180  22  32  5 . Therefore the total number of factors of 180 is 3  3  2  18 .
48. B
Sol. AB  AO  BO  a  AOB  60 P(x, y)
A
PA
  3
r a
B
 x 2  y 2  a2  3a2 a
 x 2  y 2  4a2 O a
a
49. B
Sol.  2 sin x  1 2 cos y  1  0
1
 either sin x  
2
11 7
x ,
6 6
Or
1
cos y   ,
2
2 4 
y ,
3 3
4 11 19
maximum value of x  y    .
3 6 6
50. BC
4
Sol. x 4  y4   x  y 

 2xy 2x 2  3xy  2y 2  0 
 two real and two complex roots
51. ACD
1
Sol. Given, sin x sin y cos z  .............(1)
2 2
sin2 x sin3 y 1
 ................(2)
cos z 4 2
sin x sin4 y 1
 ..................(3)
cos2 z 8
cos2 z
½  2..............(4)
sin xxin2 y
1
(3) x(4) sin y  .............. (5)
2
1
(1) x (2) sin3 x sin4 y 
16
 sin3 x  1
 sin x  1 (6)
1
 cos z  (7)
2
1 3
Now sin x  sin y  1  
2 2
tan  x  y  z   tan165   tan15  3  2
3 1
cos  y  z  
2 2
 sec  y  z   6  2
 optionsA,C,D
52. AB
x  y  1    2x  y   0
Sol.
All the lines pass through 1,2 
PA  2

PB and PC make angle with the line
6 P 1,2 C
PA : x  y  1  0
Slope of PB and PC are given by
1 A
1 B
3  2  3,2  3 xy5
1
1
3

The equation are y  2  2  3  x  1 

and y  2  2  3  x  1 
53. ACD
Sol.  
2t 2 ,t lies out-side of x  y 2  2y  3 .
54. ABD
Sol. Let p  ,q    d, r    2d, s    3d (where d > 0)
then     d  2 (i),
    d  a (ii)
   2d     3d  18 (iii)

   2d .    3d  b (iv)
On solving (i) and (iii) we get   1, d  4
55. A
56. B
Sol. (55  56)

Product of slopes of asymptotes is one. Let combined equations of asymptotes is x2 + y2
+ kxy = 0. Points on x + y = 2 at a distance 3 2 units from (1, 1) are
(4, 2) or (2, 4) with satisfies the equation of conjugate hyperbola.
22
 k=
7
 Equation of asymptotes is 7x2 + 7y2 + 22xy = 0
 Equation of hyperbola is 7x2 + 7y2 + 22xy  36 = 0
SECTION – C
57. 2
Sol. 1  x 
3n
 3nC0  3nC1x  3nC2 x 2  .......  3nC3n x 3n …………(i)
Put x  1, , 2
23n  3nC0  3nC1  3nC2  .......  3nC3n ………..(ii)
1  
3n
 3nC0  3nC1  3nC2 2  .......  3nC3n3n …………….(iii)
2 3n …………..(iv)
1     3nC0  3nC12  3nC24  .......  3nC3n 6n
Equation (ii) gives Sn  23n  8n
(ii) + (ii) + (iv) we get
3n 3n
8n  1   
 1  2  3  3n
C0  3nC3  ...........  3nC3n 
2 3n 3n
Sn        3 Tn
n
Sn   1  2   3Tn
n
 Sn  3Tn  2  1
58. 2
Sol. circle ‘C’ is x2 + y2 + y 16 = 0, it intersects the circle x2 + y2  6x  10y + 9 = 0,
7
orthogonally then   .
5
Now |r1r2|< C1C2 < r1 + r2.
59. 2
Sol.  LHS  2
 7
and RHS  2, x  and .
8 8
60. 5
Sol. Suppose k  2  log2 a  3  log3 b  log6  a  b  , then we have
1 1 ab 6k
a  2k 2 , b  3k 3 , a  b  6k , and therefore,    k  2 k  3  22  33 .
a b ab 2 3
61. 2
Sol. Let   a  ib and   a  ib
from     2 3 we here b  3
 3
Since  is real
2   2
3
We conclude that  3 is real, since  a  ib   a  a2  3b 2   ib  3a2  b 2 
We have 3a 2  b2  0  a  1
Hence   a 2  b 2  2
62. 2
Sol. Coordinates of A are (1,3), (using parametric equation of straight line)
Image of A(1,3) about x + y = 2 always lies on side BC (–1,1) h2 + k2 = 2
63. 1
Sol. Let A be  , 0  and B be  , 0  where  and  are roots of  x 2  bx  c  0
Slope (PA). slope (PB) = –1
f  x0  f  x0 
  1
 x0     x0   
f 2  x 0     x0    x0   
f 2  x 0   f  x 0  f  x0     x0    x0    
f  x 0   0 or 1
f  x0   1 f  x   0 
0
64. 8
6 3 2
Sol. Given n6   n2
Ck   n3
C2   3n2  n2
Ck  n3
C2 
Since a3  b3  c 3  3abc and a, b, c are positive  a  b  c
2
 n2   n2
Ck   n 3C2
2
Solving n2  n3C2 we get n  6 and solving n2   n 2
Ck  we get k  2
n  k  8
65. 5
Sol. Notice that we must have a  1, z  6 . Now, we can just list trying values for b, c
(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6), (1, 2, 4, 3, 5, 6), (1, 2, 5, 3, 4, 6), (1, 3, 4, 2, 5, 6), (1, 3, 5, 2, 4, 6).
Thus, our answer is 5
66. 8
Sol.    
Since cos sin1 x  1  x 2 and sin cos1 y  1  y 2 , we can use the expressions for
the first equation.
5
1  x2  1  y2 
2
1  x 1  y   49
2 2
5
1  x   1  y   2 
2 2
1  x2  1  y2   4
 2 5
 
2  x2  y2  5    
 3 4
If we use the positive square root, we get:
2 5
 
2  x2  y2  2   
3 4
4 5
x2  y2  2  
3 4
25
x2  y2 
12
If we use the negative square root, we get:
 2 5
 
2  x2  y2  2    
 3 4
4 5
x2  y2  2  
3 4
7
x2  y2  
12
25
Since the second value for x 2  y 2 is negative, x 2  y 2 
12
a2 25
2
 , so  a,b    5, 3 
b  3 12
SECTION – D
67. 00324.75
Sol. f(x0) = x03 = 1
 x0 = 1
x+y=0
Also, x0 + y0 = 0  y0 = 1
x4 (x0, y0)
Now, y  f(x)  c
4
x4
Also, y 0  0  c
4
1 3
1  c  c
4 4
x4  3
 f(x) 
4
68. 00037.33
Sol. The two lines are parallel and 6 units apart.
The point is 4 units from the first line. B

Instead of the given lines consider the lines y  0, y  6 and the
point  0,2  q
A
x0 y2 0, 2
Equation of AB:  r
cos  sin   
x0 y2 C
Equation of AC:  r
cos  60    sin  60   
  r cos ,2  r sin   lies on y  6
 r sin   4
r cos  60   ,2  r sin  60     lies on the line y  0
 r sin  60     2
sin  60   1

sin  2
3 1 1 2
cot     cot  
2 2 2 3
3 2
sin   ,cos  
7 7
4 4 7 112
 r   r2   37.33
sin  3 3
69. 00400.00
Sol. sin t and cos t are roots of 50x 2  5mx   4m  41  0
Since sin2 t  cos2 t  1
2
 5m   4m  41 
   2  1
 50   50 
m2  16m  64  0
m8
25m2
  400
4

Part Tests 2019

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part Tests 2019

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FIITJEE JEE (Advanced)-2019

Time Allotted: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 180

B. Filling of OMR Sheet

C. Marking Scheme For All Three Parts.

Name of the Candidate

Acceleration due to gravity g = 10 m/s2

Gas Constant R = 8.314 J K1 mol1

Atomic No: H=1, He = 2, Li=3, Be=4, B=5, C=6, N=7, O=8,

PART – I (Physics), PART – II (Chemistry), PART – III (Mathematics):

For questions 11 to 18, 29 to 36, 47 to 54.

If answer is 348.4 / 251.37 / 213

(One or More than one correct type)

1. Bodies of mass m=0.5 kg, resting on a horizontal v0 v0

2. A point like object of mass m is able to move up and down on a

Space for Rough work

3. One end of a thread of length l = 1 m is attached to an inclined

4. A small ball of mass m=0.1 kg is attached to a  =1 m-long thread and is

(A) 0.5m (B) 1m

Space for Rough work

6. A small rubber eraser is placed at one edge of a quarter-circle-shaped track of R

Space for Rough work

Paragraph for Question Nos. 7 and 8

7. The minimum distance by which S2 should be pulled towards right so that

Space for Rough work

Paragraph for Question Nos. 9 and 10

9. The tension in the string will be

Space for Rough work

Space for Rough work

18. One stick leans on another as shown in Figure . A right angle is

Space for Rough work

(One or More than one correct type)

20. The correct statement(s) among the following is/are

21. The correct reaction(s) among the following is/are

22. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?

Space for Rough work

Paragraph for Question Nos. 25 to 26

25. Minimum concentration of Ag+ required for the precipitation of Ag3PO4 is

Paragraph for Question Nos. 27 to 28

27. The total pressure of the mixture of a gases at equilibrium is

Space for Rough work

Space for Rough work

Mathematics PART – III

(One or More than one correct type)

(A) if n is even, then In = 0 (B) if n is odd, then In = 

Space for rough work

42. Let a, b be real numbers such that lim

Paragraph for Question Nos. 43 to 44

Space for rough work

Paragraph for Question Nos. 45 to 46

Space for rough work

51. Let p(x) be a fourth degree polynomial, with derivative p(x),

Space for rough work

Time Allotted: 3 Hours Maximum Marks: 180

C. Marking Scheme For All Three Parts.

Name of the Candidate

Gas Constant R = 8.314 J K1 mol1

Atomic No: H=1, He = 2, Li=3, Be=4, B=5, C=6, N=7, O=8,

PART – I (Physics), PART – II (Chemistry), PART – III (Mathematics):

For questions 11 to 18, 29 to 36, 47 to 54.

If answer is 348.4 / 251.37 / 213

Before Collision After Collision

3. Two balls of masses M and m are attached to two threads of length l, M   m

Space for Rough work

Space for Rough work